Oj

PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II BIA PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO Division ......
Section Title ....................................................................... ........................................ Pages SPECIFICATIONS GROUP Facility Construction Subgroup DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 ......... GENERAL PROVISIONS .................................................. ........................................ 9 15020 ......... SYSTEMS BALANCING .................................................... ........................................ 4 15050 ......... PIPE AND FITTINGS......................................................... ........................................ 8 15100 ......... VALVES AND SPECIALTIES ............................................ ........................................ 11 15180 ......... INSULATION ..................................................................... ........................................ 4 15200 ......... WATER SERVICE ............................................................. ........................................ 4 15400 ......... PLUMBING ........................................................................ ........................................ 8 15500 ......... FIRE PROTECTION .......................................................... ........................................ 7 15650 ......... HEAT PUMP SYSTEM ...................................................... ........................................ 8 15800 ......... AIR DISTRIBUTION........................................................... ........................................ 11 15950 ......... AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ....................... ........................................ 21 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 ......... GENERAL PROVISIONS .................................................. ........................................ 9 16011 ......... TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .................. ........................................ 1 16040 ......... IDENTIFICATION .............................................................. ........................................ 2 16110 ......... RACEWAYS ...................................................................... ........................................ 7 16120 ......... CONDUCTORS ................................................................. ........................................ 3 16130 ......... OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES........................ ........................................ 3 16133 ......... CABINETS ......................................................................... ........................................ 4 16140 ......... WIRING DEVICES AND DEVICE PLATES ....................... ........................................ 6 16155 ......... MOTOR STARTERS ......................................................... ........................................ 6 16160 ......... PANELBOARDS ................................................................ ........................................ 9 16170 ......... DISCONNECT SWITCHES ............................................... ........................................ 3 16181 ......... FUSES ............................................................................... ........................................ 2 16410 ......... ELECTRIC SERVICE ........................................................ ........................................ 2 16421 ......... SECONDARY SURGE ARRESTORS ............................... ........................................ 2 16450 ......... GROUNDING..................................................................... ........................................ 3 16460 ......... TRANSFORMERS............................................................. ........................................ 4 16510 ......... LUMINARIES ..................................................................... ........................................ 5 16601 ......... LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ............................... ........................................ 5 16721 ......... FIREALARM AND DETECTION ........................................ ........................................ 16 16730 ......... CLOCK AND PROGRAM SYSTEM................................... ........................................ 3 16740 ......... TELEPHONE SERVICE .................................................... ........................................ 2 16741 ......... VOICE/DATA ROUGH-IN .................................................. ........................................ 2 16742 ......... VOICE AND DATA CABLING............................................ ........................................ 6 16743 ......... FIBER OPTIC CABLING.................................................... ........................................ 4 16760 ......... INTERCOMMUNICATION AND PROGRAM SYSTEM ..... ........................................ 7 16780 ......... TV SIGNAL CABLING ....................................................... ........................................ 5
This Page Intentionally Blank
16850 ......... ELECTRIC HEATING EQUIPMENT.................................. ........................................ 1 16910 ......... CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT .................................... ........................................ 1 Site and Infrastructure Subgroup DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 221113 ....... FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING...................... ........................................ 36 221313 ....... FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS........................................ ........................................ 9 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 311000 ....... SITE CLEARING................................................................ ........................................ 6 312000 ....... EARTH MOVING ............................................................... ........................................ 15 312200 ....... AGGREGATE BASE COURSE AND GRAVEL SURFACIN....................................... 4 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321313 ....... CONCRETE PAVING ........................................................ ........................................ 321373 ....... CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS ......................... ........................................ 323113 ....... CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ................................. ........................................ 329300 ....... PLANTS ............................................................................. ........................................
15 8 8 15
APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1. SCOPE OF WORK: A. The work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary for and incidental to the complete installation of the mechanical system as herein described and indicated on the Drawings. This Section applies to and forms a part of the succeeding Sections in Division 15 - Mechanical. This Section and each of the Sections to which it applies are subject to the requirements of the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 of these complete Specifications. The Mechanical Work includes work outlined in Sections 15010, 15050, 15100, 15180, 15200, 15400, 15500, 15650, 15800, and 15950. Submittal of a Bid shall indicate the Contractor has examined the Site and Drawings and has included all required allowances in this Bid. No allowance shall be made for errors resulting from the Contractor's failure to visit job sites and to review Drawings. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officers Representative (COR) of any apparent discrepancies or omissions from the Drawings or Specifications for clarification before Bids are submitted. Neither the Owner nor Contracting Officers Representative will be responsible for any oral instructions or modifications of the Specifications or Drawings prior to opening of Bids. Written interpretation or clarification will be made by Addenda. Discrepancies or field problems, discovered during construction, shall be immediately called to the attention of the COR for decision.
B.
C.
D.
2.
DEFINITIONS: A. "Furnish" - Supply equipment as required by these Drawings and Specifications, delivered to the job site for installation or use by others.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 1
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO
B.
"Install" - Fix in position, for total operational use, all apparatus as shown, specified, or required. Provide all miscellaneous fitting and wiring supplies. "Provide" - Furnish and install in place, total and operational. "Or Equivalent - Equipment or material selected by COR. Use only equipment or materials identified by manufacturer's name and catalog or model number in Specifications or on Drawings. Refer to substitution procedure elsewhere in this Section.
C. D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. NOT APPLICABLE THIS SECTION.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. TEMPORARY FACILITIES: A. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements and/or supplementary conditions for details of temporary facilities.
2.
PROJECT EXECUTION: A. COR shall not be responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by Contractor. COR shall not be responsible for safety precautions and programs incident to work of Contractor. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. Refer to Division 0 and Division 1.
B.
C.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 2
3.
DRAWINGS: A. The Drawings indicate the extent and general layout of the mechanical systems intended for the building. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, connections and accessories which may be required. This Contractor shall furnish and install offsets, fittings and accessories as required to provide a complete and operating installation in general conformance with the Plans and Specifications. In general, it is intended that ductwork and piping be installed parallel to building lines, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, and that equipment be located symmetrical with the architectural elements of the building. Ductwork and piping shall be fabricated from Contractor's Shop Drawings or field measurements and not from Contract Drawings. In general, the Mechanical Equipment Drawings are drawn to scale as noted. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for dimensions and locations of walls, partitions, plumbing fixture mounting height, etc., and do not scale the Mechanical Drawings. Consult the Architectural Drawings for details of construction, ceiling heights and types, etc., and the Electrical Drawings for light fixture and speaker sizes and locations. Field measurements shall take precedence over Architect's Drawings.
B.
C.
4.
COORDINATION: A. This Contractor shall coordinate his work with the other Contractors on the project and install mechanical systems in a manner which will conform to structure, keep passageways and openings clear, preserve head room, clear lighting fixtures and not cover up junction boxes. This Contractor shall make minor offsets in piping or ductwork to avoid interferences with other trades, when so directed by the COR, at no additional cost to the Owner. Division 15 piping, duct and equipment installations shall comply with National Electrical Code requirements 110-16 "working spaces" and 384-4 "dedicated spaces". I.E. Mechanical ducts and pipes shall not be installed in the space near electrical panels/equipment defined as "working spaces" or "dedicated spaces".
B.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 3
5.
CODES: A. The entire installation shall be made in accordance with State and Local Laws and Ordinances, plus the latest editions of the following Codes/Regulations: NFPA 5000 Building Construction and Safety Code, 2006 Edition; Uniform Plumbing Code, 2006 Edition; 2007 NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation for Sprinkler Systems; 2007 NFPA 24, Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances; Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines (36 CFR, Part 1191: ADAABAAG), including using ADAABAAG child anthropometrics clarified in Bureau of Indian Affairs Office of Facilities Management and construction, School Facilities Design Handbook/Space Templates, issued June 25, 2007.; Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC), 2006 Edition; National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); B. Meeting the minimum standards of the above Codes does not permit a lower grade of construction where Plans or Specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of Code Requirements.
6.
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRIOR APPROVAL TO QUOTE: A. Refer to Division 1.
7.
SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Refer to Division 1.
8.
MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS: A. Refer to Division 1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 4
9.
TESTING AND BALANCING: A. B. All low pressure heating and heat pump water systems shall be tested at 100 PSIG for two (2) hours, during which time pressure must remain constant. All domestic water piping shall be tested at 125 PSIG for two (2) hours, during which time pressure must remain constant. Sewer, soil, waste, drain and vent piping shall be tested by closing all openings and subjecting the system to an air pressure test of five (5) PSIG and this pressure must remain constant for fifteen minutes without the addition of air. The air test may be applied to the plumbing system in its entirety or in sections. No drainage or plumbing system or part thereof shall be covered until it has been tested as herein specified. At completion of work, bubblers and faucets shall be adjusted for proper operation. All flush valves shall be adjusted for quiet efficient operation. See Division 1 for Commissioning services.
C.
D.
E. 10.
UNDERGROUND UTILITIES: A. Locations of existing underground utilities are based on available site information and are shown only in an approximate way. The Contractor shall determine the utility locations before commencing work and shall be responsible to repair or pay for the repair of any damages to any utilities resulting from construction work he performed.
11.
PERMITS AND LICENSES: A. This Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and licenses required for the execution of his Contract, including any City Utility Tapping or Water Meter Fees.
12.
CLEANING: A. Each Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning up after his work, including the removal of all scrap material left on the job by his men or Subcontractors. This will include the removal of all pipe cuttings, pieces of pipe and insulation and other debris. Any insulating cement or finishing cement droppings shall be removed.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 5
B.
After all tests have been made and the mechanical systems are operating properly, this Contractor shall go over the entire system and remove labels from all plumbing fixtures and other mechanical equipment. The plumbing system shall be sterilized as per directions of the State Plumbing Code. Clean all heating units, clean and straighten fins on all coils, clean scale, dirt or debris off piping, motors, etc., oil or grease all motors, fan bearings, pump gear boxes, etc., and leave in a clean best possible working condition. Install clean filters in ventilation system prior to turning job over to Owner. The geothermal heat pump system shall be cleaned as follows: This Contractor shall furnish, at his expense, trisodium phosphate, one pound for each fifty (50) gallons of water in the heating system. Fill, vent and circulate the system with this solution with the boiler being operated so as to produce design temperature. Equivalent Industrial Alkaline Cleaner products in liquid or powder form are acceptable. After circulation for a few hours, the system should be drained completely and refilled with fresh water and a corrosion inhibitor in the proper concentration to provide optimum corrosion protection. The system, when refilled, should give an alkaline reading (PH between 7 and 8). The Contractor shall, at his expense, provide a test kit for determining the PH of the water.
C.
D.
13.
ELECTRIC WIRING: A. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish all motors, special controls and electrical devices as specified herein for proper operation of the equipment furnished. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install, as required, disconnects, starters, switches, etc., and do all necessary power and control wiring including the installation of electrical devices such as thermostats, humidistats, remote control panels, etc., furnished separately by Mechanical Contractor, unless otherwise noted in Equipment Specifications.
B.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 6
C.
In general, motors of 1/3 HP and less shall be 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hertz and motors of 1/2 HP and larger shall be 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz unless specified otherwise. This Contractor shall furnish electric motors of the proper voltage and phase for the job and shall verify this by checking the Electrical Drawings before ordering equipment. See paragraph substitutions and approval to quote for this contractors responsibilities on approved equal equipment.
D. 14.
CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Refer to General Conditions. Unless specifically called out to be performed by other Contractors, the Mechanical Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching required for the installation of material and equipment furnished under his Contract. Cutting shall be carefully done and damage to buildings, utilities, pipes, wiring or equipment, as a result of cutting for installation, shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trade involved. The Mechanical Contractor shall assume the cost of repairing any cuts required in the performance of his work. Ducts passing through gypsum board/framed walls shall be installed prior to gypsum board and shall be sealed by the General Contractor. Ducts installed after gypsum board has been installed shall be patched/sealed by Mechanical Contractor. Opening/holes cut to allow passage of ductwork through concrete floor shall be patched by the Contractor doing the cutting unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. This also applies to piping through non rated floors. Pipe penetrations through fire rated walls and floors shall be sealed with a UL classified Fire Stop System. Fire Stops shall be provided in accordance with the appropriate System No. as it relates to pipe size/Material and wall or floor rating/material. Fire Stop System material shall be a pH of 6.5-7 products by 3M Fire Barrier, Metacaulk, Hilti or Nelson Firestop Products or similar.
B.
C.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 7
15.
DUCT PENETRATIONS: A. Openings between ductwork and fire rated walls and floors shall be sealed with fire rated caulking or steel collars on both sides of wall or floor. Caulking material shall be a pH of 6.5-7 equivalent to 3M "Fire Barrier", Metacaulk 835 or equivalent by Nelson Firestop Products.
16.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the excavation, backfill and compaction to facilitate installation of underground piping. Refer to Division 2 for Specifications on Excavation, Backfill and Compaction.
B. 17.
RECORD DRAWINGS: A. B. Refer to Division 1. As work progresses, all Contractors performing work under this Division shall maintain two sets of clean Drawings marked-up in red pencil to fully indicate actual conditions of record. These Drawings shall be shown in the same general detail utilized in the initial Contract Drawings. Particular attention should be given to marking the actual location of underground utilities. Affix all addendum and change order descriptions to appropriate record drawings sheet, utilizing spray adhesive. Submit Record Drawings to COR along with Manuals at close of project.
C.
D. 18.
GUARANTEE: A. Refer to Division 1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 8
B.
This Contractor shall guarantee all materials, workmanship and the proper operation of all equipment installed by him for a period of one year after the Owner's beneficial use of the building and/or mechanical system. Guarantee and warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all equipment, materials and workmanship found to be defective or non-conforming to the Contract Documents during that one year period. Guarantee shall include trips to the project site by the Contractor as required to make adjustments to mechanical equipment to insure it is operating as intended. Specified guarantee shall not relieve Contractor from liability arising from improper installation or non-compliance with applicable codes.
C.
D.
END OF SECTION 15010
GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 9
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15020 SYSTEM BALANCING -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1. SCOPE OF WORK: A. The Mechanical Contractor shall employ an independent Testing and Balancing Contractor specializing in total system air and hydronic testing and balancing. The Balancing Contractor shall provide all labor, engineering and test equipment required to adjust and balance all heating, ventilating, air conditioning and exhaust systems as hereinafter specified. All personnel involved in the execution of the work under the Balancing Contract shall be experienced and factory-trained specifically in the total balancing of mechanical systems, as well as being regular employees of the Balancing Contractor. The Company bidding this Section of Work shall be a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor. The Balancing Contract shall incorporate the following: 1. 2. 2. Adjust and balance the complete mechanical system as hereinafter specified. Record all test data and submit four copies to the Engineer upon completion of the Balancing Contract.
B. C.
EQUIPMENT: A. All test equipment will be furnished by the Balancing Contractor and will remain his property. All instruments will have been calibrated recently and verification of calibration provided with submittal data.
3.
SCHEDULE: A. Testing and balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and in full working order. The Mechanical Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and shall continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Correct operation of equipment and system components and cleanliness of process piping and ductwork shall be the responsibility of the appropriate Contractor.
SYSTEMS BALANCING
15020 - 1
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO 4. MODIFICATIONS TO HVAC SYSTEM: A. The Mechanical Contractor shall make any changes required for correct balance, as recommended by the Balancing Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. Such changes may encompass but are not necessarily restricted to pulleys, belts, ductwork, dampers, or the addition of dampers and access doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. NOT APPLICABLE THIS SECTION.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. AIR SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS: A. B. Test and adjust fan speeds to deliver the required CFM and record RPM and full load amperes. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts to verify design CFM, where possible. Seal duct access holes with rubber or metal snap-in plugs. The use of duct tape to seal access holes will not be permitted. Adjust all supply and exhaust zones to design CFM. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements and also adjust so as to minimize drafts in all areas.
C. D. 2.
HYDRONIC SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS: A. Prior to testing and balancing of the geothermal water systems, the following items will be accomplished to prepare the system for balancing. 1. 2. 3. Verify that strainers have been removed and cleaned. Check expansion tanks and verify that the system is not air bound and is completely filled with water. Check air vents at coils and high points of the water system and verify all are installed and operating freely. Position all automatic valves, hand valves and balancing valves for full flow through coils, converters, etc.
4. B. C.
Balance geothermal water flow. Mark and record flow readings of balancing devices.
SYSTEMS BALANCING
15020 - 2
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO 3. BALANCING DATA: A. B. The Test Report shall include the following information. Motors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. C. Fans: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. D. Pumps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Manufacturer Model or Serial Number Rated GPM Rated Head Measured GPM (total of individual unit flows) Operating Head Manufacturer Model or Serial Number Rated CFM Rated RPM Rated Pressures Measured CFM Measured RPM Measured Pressures Pulley Size, Type and Manufacturer Belt Size and Quantity Manufacturer Model or Serial Number Rated Amperage and Voltage Rated Horsepower Rated RPM Measured Amperage and Voltage Measured RPM Sheave Size, Type and Manufacturer
SYSTEMS BALANCING
15020 - 3
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO E. Air Systems (Including Inlets and Outlets): 1. 2. 3. 4. F. Grille or Diffuser Reference Number and Manufacturer Grille or Diffuser Location Design CFM Measured CFM
Heat Pumps: 1. 2. Design CFM Measured CFM
G.
Heating/Cooling Fluid: 1. 2. 3. 4. Glycol Manufacturer Glycol Type Design Concentration % by Weight or Temperature Protected to (F.) Actual Concentration % by Weight or Temperature Protected to (F.)
H.
Heat Recovery Unit: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Manufacturer and Type Design Air Inlet and Outlet Temperatures Design Preheat and Heating Coil Inlet and Outlet Temperatures Design Fresh Air and Exhaust Air Pressure Drops Design Coil Flow Rates Measured Air Inlet and Outlet Temperatures Measured Preheat and Heating Coil Inlet and Outlet Temperatures Measured Fresh Air and Exhaust Air Pressure Drops Measured Coil Flow Rates END OF SECTION
SYSTEMS BALANCING
15020 - 4
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15050 PIPE AND FITTINGS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY A. This section includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2. Domestic water piping inside the building. Sanitary waste and vent piping. Heat pump piping inside the building. Heat pump condensate piping. Humidifier steam and condensate piping.
SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control test reports.
3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Comply with NSP 61, Drinking Water System Components Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9, for potable domestic water piping and components. Comply with ASME B31.9, Building Services Piping, for materials, products, and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. All steel pipe shall be Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM, A-53, or A-106. Steel pipe shall be used for the following: 1. B. Heat pump piping inside building.
Joints and fittings for steel pipe 2" and smaller, shall be ASA 125 pound class, screwed cast iron for Schedule 40 pipe and ASA 250 pound class for Schedule 80. The Contractor, at his option, may weld joints 2" and smaller (see below).
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15050 1
C.
All joints and fittings larger than 2" shall be welded using welding rods of similar material to that of the pipe. Welded fittings shall be ASTM A105 or A234 STD for Schedule 40 pipe and extra strong fittings for Schedule 80 pipe. All welded pipe fittings shall be as manufactured by Tube-Turn, Anvil or Ladish. Before erection, all piping shall be internally cleaned to remove all loose scale. After cutting, all pipe shall be reamed full size and the inside cleaned of all cuttings, scale and foreign material prior to erection. All erected pipe shall be kept plugged or capped to keep foreign materials from getting into the system. Threads shall be right-hand, clean cut, full depth, tapered, and pipe standard. Joints shall be made tight with graphite, teflon tape, or pipe compound only; the use of lead, paint or caulking is prohibited. Welded joints shall have each pipe or fitting beveled to form a "V" when the sections are put together. Weld, using welding rods of same material as pipe. All slag shall be removed between successive weld passes and the joint cleaned of all slag and ground smooth. All welding shall be done by certified welders only. At the Contractor's option, steel schedule 5 pipe conforming to ASTM A-135, or A53 may be used along with "Pressfit System" fittings and couplings 2" and smaller. Couplings and fittings shall be formed from cold drawn steel with self-contained grade "E" molded synthetic rubber O-rings. Fittings and couplings shall be pressed onto the pipe using a Victaulic Pressfit Tool only. Provide necessary hangers and support piping at intervals as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Heat pump piping inside building.
D.
E.
F.
2.
COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. All copper pipe shall be seamless, hard drawn temper conforming to the ASTM B-88 above ground and seamless soft copper conforming to the ASTM-88 below grade. Each length shall have the trademark of the manufacturer plainly stamped on the metal and shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer not to split or otherwise be defective. All domestic piping shall be Type "L" when run above grade. All pipe run in gravel, sand or soil shall be Type "K" soft copper. Vent and waste piping, at the Contractors option, shall be Type "DWV". Fittings shall be sweat pattern, wrought copper or cast bronze above ground and flare or compression type below ground. Drainage pattern fittings shall be used for waste and vent piping.
B.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15050 2
C.
Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurement established at the building by the Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building. Change in pipe size shall be made with reduced fittings. All piping shall be pitched to drain and equipped with hose bibbs at low points. Tube shall be cut square and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of fitting and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned before sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing when making connections. Installation shall be made by competent workmen in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Unions shall be provided where required for disconnection of equipment and where shown. Solder joints on potable water piping shall be made using solder containing no lead. Pipe and fittings used in potable water supply systems shall not contain lead. At the Contractor's option, Type "L" copper and wrought copper fittings or roll grooved copper pipe with Victaulic copper connection couplings with EPDM gaskets may be used for the heat pump piping inside the building. Humidifier steam and condensate piping shall be Type L copper with brazed fittings. Steam piping shall be installed with a minimum grade of 1 inch per 40 feet in the direction of steam flow. T-drill connections in copper piping used for domestic water, and heat pump piping inside the building are acceptable. All joints created in this manner shall be installed/brazed in compliance with Code and the manufacturers recommendations. The branch tube shall be notched and contain a double dimple to insure proper penetration in the main line. Rigid ProPress connection system using copper fittings/piping may be used for domestic water and heat pump piping inside the building.
D. E. F.
G. H. I.
J. 3.
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE FITTINGS: A. B. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the Collective Trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Contractor shall use "No-Hub" for waste and vent system piping. 1. "No-Hub" pipe and fittings shall conform to Cast Iron Institute Standard 30195.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15050 3
2.
Couplings shall consist of neoprene gasket and stainless steel shield conforming to CISPI 310. Couplings shall be tightened with torque wrench to manufacturer's recommendations. "No-Hub" piping shall be adequately supported. Pipe and fittings have "No Rock" features. The neoprene joints shall not be used to transmit support from one piece of pipe to another. Where "No-Hub" system connects to other piping systems, proper adapters shall be used.
3.
4. 4. HANGERS: A. 5.
See Section 15100.
MECHANICAL GROOVED FITTINGS: A. B. At the Contractor's option, Victaulic fittings and grooved pipe may be used for the heat pump piping system on piping 2" and larger. With respect to Victaulic pipe couplings and fittings: 1. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 77 and/or Style 75 with housings fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron castings. Coupling gasket shall be Victaulic Grade "E", EPDM compound for water service and Grade "T", Nitrile compound for petroleum or air with oil service. Coupling bolts shall be oval neck track head type with hexagonal heavy nuts per ASTM A183-60. All pipe fittings used with Victaulic pipe couplings shall be fabricated of malleable iron castings. Where Victaulic malleable fitting pattern is not available, fittings fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe or standard wall seamless welding fittings with grooved ends may be used. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with Victaulic soap base lubricant to facilitate installation. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in latest published literature.
2.
3. 4. C. D.
All components of couplings/fittings system to be of the same manufacturer. Equivalent fittings by Star Fitting and Anvil are acceptable.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15050 4
6.
PLASTIC PIPING (INSIDE BUILDING): A. At the Contractor's option, Schedule 40 PVC-DWV or ABS-DWV piping with appropriate fittings and solvent joints may be used for waste and vent piping, above and below ground, and drain piping from the heat pumps. Plastic piping is not allowed to be used in return air plenums above ceilings or in walls or chases used for unducted return air. See plumbing code for requirements for expansion every 35 feet if plastic piping is used. The installing contractor will be responsible for fire-stopping all penetrations through smoke/fire partitions. Method used shall be U.L. listed. Fire caulk or intumescent wrap by 3M or Rectorseal approved.
B. C.
7.
FLASHINGS: A. Vent stacks shall be extended at least 6" above the roof and shall be encased in galvanized iron frost-proof jackets, Moore #1, each having an air space of at least 1" between the outside surface of the pipe and the inside surface of the frost jacket. The minimum size of any vent passing through the roof shall be 2". Openings in the roof for vent lines, ductwork or other piping shall be flashed with 4# sheet lead made watertight by caulking or other acceptable means. Flashing shall extend not less than 12" from the outside edge of the vent, drain or pipe and shall be mopped in with roofing material to make a watertight installation. Flashing method shall be as accepted by the Architect. Nobleflex or approved equal manufactured by the Noble Company, Grand Haven, Michigan, may be used for roof drain flashings in lieu of 4# lead. The material is a laminated flashing of a non-plasticized chlorinated polyethylene sheet to asphalt saturated roofing felt. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's directions. All floor drains shall be furnished with 30" square minimum size, 4 lb./sq.ft. lead flashings. Dow CPE (non-plasticized chlorinated polyethylene) membrane, nominal .040" thick, as manufactured by the Noble Company or approved equal, may be used for concealed membrane waterproofing. Joints for larger areas and vertical receptor extensions shall be made as recommended by the manufacturer. Welding with CPE solvent bonding liquid or xylene.
B.
C.
D. E.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15050 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT: A. Where equipment or material is received and stored prior to installation, adequate protection from weather, vandalism and incidental construction damage shall be provided. The Contractor shall repair or replace equipment/material damaged during receipt, storage or installation.
B. 2.
EXCAVATION: A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section Earthwork.
3.
CONNECTIONS: A. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
4.
INSTALLATION: A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Review manufacturers installation instructions for material and equipment to be installed and follow same. If there is conflict between the manufacturers installation instructions and the CORs drawings, consult the COR for determination of proper installation procedures. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved in coordination drawings. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
B.
C. D. E.
F.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15050 6
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO G. H. Install piping to allow application of insulation. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. END OF SECTION 15050
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15050 7
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15100 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1. GENERAL: A. B. All valves shall be accessibly located and equal in area to the pipes on which they are placed. Valves as manufactured by Stockham, Watts, Apollo, Kitz, Nibco, Jomar, Victaulic, Star Fittings, Kennedy, Milwaukee, Crane, Hammond, American Valve, Mueller, Anvil, and Jenkins are approved equal.
2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 1. B. C. Exceptions: Domestic hot and cold water piping valves unless referenced.
ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
3.
SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for all materials under this Section. For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; furnished specialties; and accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. GATE VALVES: A. Valves 2" and smaller shall be Nibco T-111 screw-in bonnet, bronze, screwed, 125# steam, 200# WOG gate valves with solid wedge disc and rising stem. 1. If unable to use a rising stem valve because of insufficient clearance, use a Nibco non-rising stem valve.
VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
15100 1
B.
Valves 2" and larger shall be Nibco F-617-0 iron body flanges, 125# steam, 200# WOG gate valve with bronze trim and rising stem. 1. If unable to use a rising stem valve because of insufficient clearance, use Nibco F-619 non-rising stem valve.
C.
Solder Joint Gate Valves: 1. Valves 3" and smaller shall be Nibco S-111 solder joint, 200# W. gate valve with solid disc and rising stem.
2.
GLOBE VALVES: A. Threaded Joint Globe Valves: 1. Valves 2" and smaller shall be Nibco T-211. Valves shall be Class 125 bronze, 200 PSI WOG type with integral seat, screw-in bonnet and renewable seat and bronze disc. Valves shall be rated for 125 PSI saturated steam to 353F and 125 PSI fluid to 406F.
B.
Flanged Joint Globe Valves: 1. Valves 2" and larger shall be Nibco F-718-B, iron body. Valves shall be Class 125 iron body, 200 PSI WOG from -20F to 150F type with bolted bonnet, renewable seat and bronze disc and flanged connections. Valves shall be rated for 125 PSI saturated steam to 353F and 125 PSI fluid to 406F.
C.
Solder Joint Globe Valves: 1. Valves 2" and smaller shall be Nibco S-211. Valves shall be Class 125 bronze, 200 PSI WOG type with integral seat, screw-in bonnet and renewable seat and bronze disc. Valves shall have solder ends and shall be rated for 125 PSI saturated steam to 353F and 125 PSI fluid to 406F.
3.
CHECK VALVES: A. B. Valves 2" and smaller shall be Nibco T-413-B, bronze, screwed, Y pattern, 200# WOG swing check valve. Valves 2" and larger shall be Nibco F-918-B, iron body, flanged, 200# WOG swing check valve with bronze trim. Victaulic check valves will be acceptable.
15100 2
C.
Solder Joint Check Valves: 1. Valves 3" and smaller shall be Nibco S-413-B, bronze, solder joint Y pattern, 200# W swing check valve.
D.
Silent Check Valves: 1. 2. 3. On sizes 3" and greater, install a Nibco Figure F-910 globe style iron body, silent check valve, 125 pound flanged. For 2" size, furnish and install Nibco Figure W-910, wafer style, 125 pound, iron body, silent check valve. Check valves by Williams-Hager, Anvil Gruvlock or Mueller are acceptable.
E. 4.
In addition to equivalent check valves by the above listed companies, check valves by Titan Flow Control Inc. are acceptable.
BALL VALVES: A. B. C. D. On the supply and return runout to each heating/cooling terminal unit, such as heat pump, etc., furnish and install an "Apollo" Series 70-10X bronze ball valve. Ball valves may be omitted on the return runout to each terminal unit where a "ball valve" flow indicator shutoff valve combination is installed. In general, ball valves are preferred over gate and globe valves on domestic water and heat pump system piping on sizes 2" and smaller. Only ball valves with packing nut and separate handle nut are acceptable.
5.
BUTTERFLY VALVES: A. B. C. On all piping sizes 2" and larger in heating, heat pump, or cooling systems, this Contractor shall use butterfly valves in lieu of gate valves. Butterfly valves shall be Nibco Figure LD-2000, lug type with lockable handle in sizes 5" and smaller; gear operator on sizes 6" and larger. Valves for steam and water piping (temperature limits -40F to 250F) shall have ductile iron body, EPDM elastomer seat, extended neck, streamlined alloy disc and Type 410 stainless steel stem. 150 PSIG working pressure.
D.
15100 3
6.
FLOW INDICATORS/BALANCING VALVES: A. Furnish and install on the return line to each heating and/or cooling terminal unit and each coil and, where shown on the Drawings, in the piping system, a Gerand Engineering combination flow indicator, balance/shut off valve as specified below. Venturis to be used on all lines over 48 GPM with a maximum pressure drop of 48" Venturis through 2 1/2" screwed, 3" and over for butt welding to piping. Nipples, valves and disconnects to be included with each Venturi. When Venturis are used, the contractor shall provide a separate valve for shut off purposes on sizes greater than 2" pipe size. Ball valve-Venturis shall be used on all units as scheduled 48 GPM and lower - sizes 1/2" through 2". Pressure drop not to exceed 48". Separate shutoff ball valve on return line may be omitted by Mechanical Contractor where ball valve Venturis is installed. Ball valve-Venturis shall consist of a brass teflon seated tight shutoff ball valve with a memory locking device. A fixed brass Venturi with disconnects and metal tag will be installed on the unit side of the valve. The valve will be adjusted and locked in position corresponding to the meter reading as given on the metal tag. Venturis shall be furnished with chained metal tag showing location, size, GPM and meter reading for GPM specified. A portable 0-50", 6" dial differential meter shall be furnished to or rented to Contractor for balancing flow in all units. Equivalent flow indicator/balance valves (Accusetter) by Flow Design Inc. or Tour & Anderson CBV are acceptable. Grooved pipe units by Anvil Gruvlock are acceptable. Pressure drops must be within above parameters when selecting sizes of flow indicators.
B.
C.
D.
E. F. G.
7.
UNIONS AND FLANGES: A. Unions shall be installed at final connection of all equipment and valves and where necessary to facilitate dismantling the pipe. Unions 2" and smaller shall be screwed type and 2" and larger shall be flanged. Screwed type unions shall be iron ground seat standard as manufactured by Grinnell Co. or approved equal. Solder end unions shall be all brass with ground seats.
B. C.
15100 4
D.
Where connections are made between copper and steel or iron pipe or equipment, provide union connections with gasket of inert materials to separate dissimilar metals. At Contractors option, copper flange adapters by CTS Fabrication are acceptable.
8.
OFFSETS: A. Where required to allow clearance of ducts, electrical conduit and outlet boxes, beams, etc., to avoid interference with work of other trades, to increase head room under pipes or to improve the appearance of pipe work, this Contractor shall offset his pipes as directed by the COR and shall properly drain or vent same where necessary.
9.
SLEEVES: A. Where piping passes through field poured concrete walls, floors and foundation walls, furnish and install steel pipe sleeves. Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to permit the installation of pipe covering and shall be trimmed flush with floor or wall. Where pipes pass through precast concrete walls or existing concrete walls, core drill the holes to a minimum size for the pipe required, unless extra space is needed for expansion of piping in the traverse direction. Pipe sleeves Mechanical Room or Toilet Room floors to protrude 1/2" above finished floor. At any penetration of a pipe through a fire partition, mineral wool shall be packed into the space between the pipe and sleeve and caulked on both sides with fire resistant putty or caulk or equivalent.
B.
C.
10.
FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES: A. All pipes passing through floors, wall or ceilings of finished areas shall be fitted with chrome-plated metal plates. Wall and ceiling plates shall be securely fastened in place. Floor plates shall cover sleeves.
11.
CAPS AND PLUGS: A. All openings in pipes must be capped or plugged during construction with caps or plugs.
15100 5
12.
STRAINERS: A. Furnish and install wye pattern strainers where shown on the Drawings. Strainers shall have stainless steel or brass perforated screens, iron bodies with screw ends. Strainers shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, Dunham Bush, Mueller, Armstrong, Metra Flex, Victaulic, Anvil Gruvlock, Clark Reliance, Sarco, Trane, Titan Flow Control Inc., Webster or approved equal.
13.
PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS: A. All exposed piping shall be identified as to contents and direction of flow by stenciling. Stencils on piping up to 1" size shall be 1/2" high. Stencils on larger piping or pipe covering shall be 1" high. Stencils shall be applied where pipes pass through walls, at each change of direction and on each 40 feet of straight lengths. Stencil paint color shall be black. Heat Pump Supply Heat Pump Return Domestic Cold Water Domestic Hot Water 110 Domestic Recirculating Hot Water 110 Steam Condensate System Fill Domestic Hot Water B. HPS HPR CW HW 110 RHW 110 STM COND. C.W. Fill HW 140
Stenciling shall be done after painting of piping and covering is finished. Stencils shall be neat, clear, sharp, straight, etc., to present the most attractive and orderly appearance obtainable. Where the stenciling is poorly done, blurred, running, crooked, the pipe or covering shall be repainted and re-stenciled. Preprinted markers, such as manufactured by Seton Nameplate Corp., will be acceptable in lieu of stenciling. Valves controlling mains, risers and branches, but not individual shutoff or local control valves on fixtures and equipment, shall be identified by a metal tag. Tags shall be brass with stamped numbers and code lettering as large as possible. Schedules, framed under glass and mounted where directed, shall be provided showing a complete listing of all valve tags and giving numbers, locations and color codes, if any, of pipes controlled.
C.
15100 6
14.
PIPING, SUPPORTS AND HANGERS: A. All piping shall be supported by hangers of approved design and manufacture capable of screw adjustment after erection of pipe. Hangers shall be clevis type of malleable iron or strap wrought iron and shall have locknut to threaded extension rod. Hangers shall be supported from the structural framing. Where necessary, this Contractor shall furnish and install angle iron to span between framing. Hangers for copper pipe shall be copper-plated or have polyvinyl coating. Hangers shall be spaced so as to prevent sag and permit proper drainage. A hanger shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Maximum spacing between hangers for plumbing pipe shall be as per Plumbing Code. Other piping shall be supported as follows: 1. Steel Piping: a. b. c. 2. " Thru 1" 1" Thru 3" 4" and Larger 8' 10' 12'
B.
C. D.
Copper Tubing: a. b. 1" and Smaller 1" and Larger 6' 10'
3.
Plastic Piping: a. All Sizes 4'
4.
Cast Iron Pipe: a. b. 5' Lengths 10' Lengths 5' 10'
E. F.
Vertical runs of pipe not over 15' long shall be supported by hangers placed not over 1' from the elbows on connecting horizontal runs. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe with one hanger for each pipe length. Locate hanger close to hub.
15100 7
G.
Vertical runs of pipe over 15' long shall be supported on heavy steel clamps. Clamps shall be bolted tightly around the pipes and either welded to the pipe or placed below couplings. Clamps shall rest securely on the building structure without blocking. Unless otherwise specified, hangers and hanger supports shall be as follows: 1. Hangers: a. All pipes for plumbing and heating, where temperature does not exceed 450, equal to Anvil Fig. 104, Fig. 97, or equal to Auto-Grip No. 19-400A; copper pipe hangers shall be Anvil #95CP copperplated or Michigan #102 with polyvinyl coating. Spring type hangers shall be installed at the high points of vertical piping over 30' long. Where space conditions will not permit the use of hangers listed above, a heavy duty pipe clamp may be used and supported with two adjustable drop rods, one on either side of pipe. Where three or more domestic hot, cold or recirculating water lines run parallel at same elevation and grade and in same direction, trapeze hangers may be used consisting of angles supported from construction above with two adjustable drop rods. Hangers used for cold piping systems shall be oversized to allow pipe insulation to pass continuously through the pipe hanger without a break in the insulation vapor barrier. Hangers used to support piping connected to base-mounted pumps shall be Kinetics SH-1-370 or equivalent spring type hangers. At least one hanger shall be installed on the intake pipe and one hanger on the discharge pipe of each pump.
H.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Supports: a. Brackets or angle clips shall be used for support of pipe hangers where pipes run near floor and close to wall.
15100 8
b.
Hangers shall be supported from construction above with drop rods using lag screws for wood floor construction, beam clamps, where beams are not fireproofed or concrete inserts for new concrete floor construction where the finished floor is not to be disturbed. Where the individual hanger load exceeds the capacity of a single floor deck attachment, steel angles, beams or channels shall be provided to span the number of floor deck attachments required. Do not hang any pipe from another pipe.
3.
Support Framing: a. Furnish and install Unistrut or approved equal supporting members and all fittings as required and necessary for piping supports and equipment.
15.
SUCTION DIFFUSERS: A. Provide, at each base-mounted pump, a Taco suction diffuser of size shown on Drawings. Units shall consist of an angle type body with inlet vanes and a combination diffuser strainer with 3/16" diameter openings for pump protection. Unit shall be equipped with a disposable fine mesh start-up strainer which shall be removed by the Contractor after 30 days of pump operation. Flow direction shall be from inside the strainer to outside for ease of service and cleaning. The body shall fit the pump and connecting pipe size. The unit shall be provided with an adjustable support foot to relieve piping strains from the pump suction. The Contractor shall provide valved gauge connections at diffuser inlet and pump suction to indicate when cleaning is needed. Diffuser body and straightening vanes shall be cast iron. Start-up strainer shall be bronze and permanent strainer shall be stainless steel. Diffuser shall be suitable for operation at pressures up to 175 PSIG and temperatures of 250F. Equivalent diffusers by Thrush, B & G, Mueller, Victaulic, Anvil Gruvlock and Armstrong will be acceptable.
B.
C. 16.
TRIPLE DUTY VALVE: A. Furnish multi-purpose valve, Taco MPV Series or equal, on the discharge side of each pump where indicated on the Plans. The valves are to combine a balancing valve, check valve and shutoff valve in a single body and be suitable for horizontal and/or vertical mounting. The valves shall be provided with an adjustable memory stop. The check valves shall be tight closing against an elastomer seat and be removable separately. The valve may be of the plug or spring-loaded disc type.
15100 9
B. C. 17.
The valve shall be suitable for operation at pressures of 175 PSIG and temperatures of 240F. Equivalent valves by Thrush, B & G, Mueller, Victaulic, Anvil Gruvlock or Armstrong will be acceptable.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS: A. Provide flexible pump connectors in the pump suction and discharge piping. Connectors on pipes up to and including 4" size may have corrugated brass or stainless steel core covered with high tensile brass or stainless steel braiding. Connectors on pipes larger than 4" shall have stainless steel hose and braiding. Connectors shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 150 PSIG and shall allow a movement of up to " to either side of centerline for sizes up to 2" inclusive and " for larger sizes. Flexible connectors shall be as manufactured by Keflex, Flexonics, Anaconda, FlexiJoint, Thermo-Tech, Flexact, Apache, Metra Flex, Anvil Gruvlock or Flexweld. Flexible connectors may be eliminated at the Contractors option where Victaulic or Anvil Gruvlock couplings are installed at the first three joints before and after equipment connection.
B. C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT: A. Where equipment or material is received and stored prior to installation, adequate protection from weather, vandalism and incidental construction damage shall be provided. The Contractor shall repair or replace equipment/material damaged during receipt, storage or installation.
B. 2.
INSTALLATION: A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work in complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
15100 10
B.
Review manufacturers installation instructions for material and equipment to be installed and follow same. If there is conflict between the manufacturers installation instructions and the CORs drawings, consult the COR for determination of proper installation procedures. Indicate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. Install check valves for proper direction of flow. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. END OF SECTION 15100
C. D. E. F. G.
15100 11
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15180 INSULATION -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1. SCOPE OF WORK: A. The work covered by this Specification consists in furnishing all labor, equipment, accessories and materials and in performing all operations necessary for the installation of all insulation for the plumbing, heating and duct systems, in strict accordance with the Insulation Section of this Specification and applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. All insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work. Insulation shall be Owens-Corning Fiberglass, Schuller International Inc., Knauf or products of equal quality and performance, subject to the approval of the A/E prior to the Project Bid Date.
B.
2.
SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for all materials under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. MATERIALS: A. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket, or facing and adhesive used to adhere the facing to the insulation) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by Procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding the following as determined by an Independent Testing Laboratory. Flame Spread: Smoke Developed: B. C. 25 or Less 50 or Less
Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes, glass fabric and canvas cloth for fittings, shall have the same component ratings as listed above. All products or their shipping cartons or packages shall bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed above requirements. Duct liners shall be stenciled with "Meets 90A Requirements".
INSULATION
15180 1
2.
INSULATION (PIPING): A. All domestic hot, cold and recirculating hot water piping shall be insulated with fiberglass insulation with all service jacket and self-sealing lap equivalent to Certainteed 500 deg. snap-on pipe insulation. The tape at each butt joint shall be additionally secured with a minimum of two staples. Domestic water insulation thickness shall be as listed below: 2" Pipe Size And Smaller 2" Pipe Size And Larger B. 1" Thick; 1" Thick;
All hot water heating supply and return piping shall be insulated the same as domestic water piping except with thicknesses listed below: All Sizes 1" Thick;
C.
Steam piping will be insulated the same as domestic water piping except to the following thicknesses: 2" Pipe Size and Smaller: 1" Thick;
D.
Geothermal heat pump supply and return piping inside the building shall be insulated the same as domestic water piping except with thicknesses listed below: All sizes: 1" Thick;
Insulation vapor barrier shall be carried through hanger. Provide sheet metal saddles to support insulation at hangers or use high density Styrofoam designed to carry the weight of the pipe and fluid at each hanger. E. Fittings - All fittings (elbows and tees) shall be insulated by wrapping fiberglass blanket insulation around the fitting and securing with non-corrosive wire. Vapor barrier shall consist of polyvinyl premolded jackets stapled and taped securely in place with vinyl tape. Polyvinyl jackets by Speed-Line and Zeston will be acceptable. Valves, Etc. - All valve bodies, valve bonnets, strainers, flanges, etc., shall be insulated with compressed flexible fiberglass secured in place with non-corrosive wire. Insulation shall be of the same thickness as the adjoining pipe covering. Cover fiberglass insulation with polyvinyl premolded jackets stapled and taped securely in place with vinyl tape. Polyvinyl jackets by Speed-Line and Zeston will be acceptable.
F.
INSULATION
15180 2
3.
INSULATION (DUCTWORK): A. All heat pump supply air ductwork and all interior fresh air ductwork between the heat recovery coil and the duct mounted electric heating coil shall be externally insulated with 1" thick fiberglass duct wrap, 1.0 pound density with "RFSK" reinforced foil scrim Kraft vapor barrier. Seams shall be overlapped, stapled and taped to form a continuous vapor barrier. Ducts wider than 12" will have insulation additionally secured in place with stud pins 12" O.C. Pin heads and raw edges will be sealed tight with appropriate tape. At the Contractors option, stud pins shall be of the welded type or the adhesive type as manufactured by Duro Dyne or equivalent.
4.
INSULATION (GEOTHERMAL SYSTEM WATER PUMPS/FITTINGS): A. Geothermal heat pump system pump bodies and other fittings/valve bodies that cannot be insulated with conventional fiberglass insulation and vapor barrier shall be insulated with Interstate Products, Inc., 'Cold Pipe Insulation #770' spray on insulation. 'Cold Pipe Insulation #770' is water resistant foam insulating coating that prevents condensation on cold pipes/surfaces. 'Cold Pipe Insulation #770' shall be sprayed on to a thickness of 3/4 mm to 1 1/2 mm in two thin coats. 'Cold Pipe Insulation #770' is manufactured by Interstate Products, Inc.
B. C. D. 5.
UNDERGROUND WATER AND WASTE PIPING BELOW GEOTHERMAL PIPING: A. B. As indicated on the foundation plan, waste and water piping passing below the geothermal heat pump system piping shall be insulated. Piping shall be insulated with 2" thick preformed Kaylo 10 or equivalent calcium silicate insulation blocks wired on. Over blocks apply two layers of 15 lb. felt. Coat felts and seal insulation ends with tar.
PART 3 EXECUTION 1. PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT: A. Where equipment or material is received and stored prior to installation, adequate protection from weather, vandalism and incidental construction damage shall be provided.
INSULATION
15180 3
B. 2.
The Contractor shall repair or replace equipment/material damaged during receipt, storage or installation.
INSTALLATION: A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work in complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Review manufacturers installation instructions for material and equipment to be installed and follow same. If there is conflict between the manufacturers installation instructions and the A/Es drawings, consult the A/E for determination of proper installation procedures. Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section Through-Penetration Firestop Systems for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. Install insulation continuously through wall partition and floor penetrations. END OF SECTION 15180
B.
C.
D.
INSULATION
15180 4
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15200 WATER SERVICE -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1. SCOPE OF WORK: A. The work covered under this Section shall include the furnishing of the labor, equipment and materials necessary for a complete water service to building as shown on Drawings. See Section Division 2 for Excavation and Backfill.
B. 2.
WATER SERVICE: A. B. Water service and connections shall be in accordance with the regulations of the Local Water Department serving this area. This Contractor shall pay for any tapping, connection or initial meter fees required by the Local Water Department.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. MATERIAL: A. All ductile iron pipe for water service shall be mechanical joint Class 52 350 PSI pipe conforming to AWWA C-151 and AWWA C-153 for joint. Piping shall include all joint accessories, gasket follower gland and bolts. Fittings shall be furnished with mechanical joint bell on all openings. Use retainer glands on elbow at riser. 1. 2. Retainer glands, and restraint rings shall be Ebaa Megalug type with wedge style design. Mechanical joint tee head bolts, square head bolts and hex nuts shall be all stainless steel type. Install with anti-seize compound to ease installation of fittings. Ductile iron flanges shall be secured to floor/wall with threaded rod that has been securely fastened to concrete floor or wall. Ductile iron shall be used for fire sprinkler riser.
3. 4. B.
Copper water service line shall be Type 'K' soft copper with compression or flare fittings.
WATER SERVICE
15200 1
C. D.
Certainteed P.V.C. SDR-21-200, 200 PSIG pipe with twin gasket P.V.C. couplings. Certainteed 'Vinyl Iron' PVC municipal water pipe, UL and FM approved, meeting AWWA Standard C900 with Megalug ring type joints, may be used in lieu of cast iron on fire lines 4"in size and larger,150 PSIG rating. Ductile iron shall be used for fire sprinkler riser.
2.
METER: A. Furnish and install a 2" water meter of the type approved by the Water Department for the dormitory. Meters shall have a self-generating remote readout. Install a ball valve on each side of the meter. Construct a steel angle frame or pour a concrete pad under meter to support weight. Paint support frame black. Where required by local authority, install a bypass line with valve parallel to the meter.
B.
PART 3 EXECUTION 1. INSTALLATION: A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work in complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Review manufacturers installation instructions for material and equipment to be installed and follow same. If there is conflict between the manufacturers installation instructions and the CORs drawings, consult the COR for determination of proper installation procedures. Domestic water service lines shall be installed straight and true, at right angles to wall and floor. Flange on fire sprinkler line shall be installed level with bolt pattern on flange set so valve stems connected to line can be installed parallel or perpendicular to wall. Fire sprinkler line flanges shall be secured to floor/wall with threaded rod that has been securely fastened to concrete floor or wall.
B.
C. D. E.
WATER SERVICE
15200 2
2.
PRESSURE TEST: A. Domestic Water Service: After pipe is laid, the joints completed and the trench partially backfilled, leaving the joints exposed for examination, the newly laid piping or any valved section of water line or piping shall be subjected for two hours to a hydrostatic pressure test of 125 pounds per square inch. Each valve shall be opened and closed several times during the test. Exposed pipe, joints and fittings shall be carefully examined during the partially open trench test. Joints showing visible leakage shall be replaced or remade as necessary. Cracked or defective pipe, joints, fittings or valves discovered in consequence of this pressure test shall be removed and replaced with sound material and the test shall be repeated until the test results are satisfactory. All replacement and repair shall be without additional expenses to the Owner. Backfilling shall not be resumed until test results and work has been approved by COR. Underground Fire Sprinkler Service Piping. 1. All new fire service mains shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 PSI for a minimum of 2 hours. If maximum static pressure is 150 PSI or greater, pressure test shall be at 50 PSI greater than maximum static pressure. Tests shall be performed before the joints are covered in order for leaks to be detected. Leakage from new pipe and fittings shall not exceed two quarts/hr per 100 joints or gaskets irrespective of pipe diameter. Leakage for metal seated valves may increase above leakage rate by one fluid ounce per inch valve diameter per hour for each metal seated valve isolating the test section. An operating test shall be performed on all control valves when system is under full pressure to ensure proper operation. Test shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence of the authority having jurisdiction or the representative of the owner. On completion of the test, the Contractor shall complete the "Contractor's" Material & Test Certificate For Underground Piping" as required by NFPA 24, 10.10.1, and submit copies to the Contracting Officer to the Division of Safety and Risk Management and Engineer prior to final inspection.
B.
2.
3. 4.
WATER SERVICE
15200 3
C.
Flushing of Pipe. 1. Underground mains and fire sprinkler service lines to system risers shall be flushed prior to connection to sprinkler piping. Piping shall be flushed for a significant time period to ensure piping has been thoroughly flushed. Minimum flow rate shall not be less than: (1) (2) (3) Hydraulically calculated water demand rate of system including hose requirements or Flow necessary to provide a velocity of 10 ft. per sec. or greater or Maximum flow rate available to the system under fire conditions.
3.
THRUST BLOCKS: A. On lines 4" and larger, install poured concrete thrust blocks at tees, elbows and at base elbow on domestic and fire water service risers in building. Blocks shall be poured against undisturbed earth of trench wall.
4.
INVERTS AND ELEVATIONS: A. This Contractor shall verify all inverts of existing mains and elevations with reference to existing and finish grades. Minimum depth of bury for water lines is 8'0".
5.
DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEM: A. New potable water systems shall be disinfected prior to use whenever required by the Authority having jurisdiction. The method to be followed shall be that prescribed by the Health Authority or, in case no method is prescribed by the Health Authority, the following: 1. 2. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until no dirty water appears at the points of outlet. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water-chlorine solution containing at least fifty parts per million of chlorine and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to stand for twenty-four hours. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water-chlorine solution containing at least two hundred parts per million of chlorine and allowed to stand for three hours.
3.
WATER SERVICE
15200 4
B. 2.
The Contractor shall repair or replace equipment/material damaged during receipt, storage or installation.
INSTALLATION: A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work in complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Review manufacturers installation instructions for material and equipment to be installed and follow same. If there is conflict between the manufacturers installation instructions and the A/Es drawings, consult the A/E for determination of proper installation procedures. Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section Through-Penetration Firestop Systems for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. Install insulation continuously through wall partition and floor penetrations. END OF SECTION 15180
B.
C.
D.
INSULATION
15180 4
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15400 PLUMBING -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1. SCOPE OF WORK: A. The work covered under this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment and material necessary for a complete plumbing system consisting of, but not limited to, waste piping and domestic water piping, gas piping and plumbing fixtures. See Section 15050 for Pipe and Fittings, Division 2 for Excavation and Backfill, Section 15100 for Valves and Specialties and Section 15180 for Insulation. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines (36 CFR, Part 1191 ADAABAAG), including using ADAABAAG child anthropometrics clarified in Bureau of Indian Affairs Office of Facilities Management and Construction, School facilities Design Handbook/Space Templates, issued June 25, 2007. (U.S. Code, Title 25, Section 2005) Provide multiple numbers of accessible elements/fixtures, as necessary to provide the anthropometrics of all primary user age groups within a space/area (for example Adults and/or students older than 12 years; students age 9-12; and/or students ages 58.
B. C.
2.
SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for the equipment in this Section as per Paragraph 15010-09.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. CLEANOUTS: A. Brass screw cleanout plugs shall be furnished and installed, where required by Code, to permit the entire drainage system to be routed out easily. The size of each cleanout shall be the same as the line into which it is connected when said line is 4" in diameter or less and not less than 4" for piping 4" and 6" in size. Cleanouts for piping larger than 6" shall be 6" in size. All cleanout connections in sewer shall, where space permits, consist of long radius 1/4 bends or two 1/8 bends. Cleanouts on verticals shall be test tees with cleanout plugs not less than 4" or more than 6" above the floor level and 18" from any wall. All cleanouts shall be accessible with reference to the finished building. Cleanouts in floor shall have cover plates set flush with finished floor.
PLUMBING
15400 1
B.
All cleanouts in finished floor shall be cast iron with serrated cutoff sections or adjustable housings with bronze or brass internal plug same size as cleanout ferrule and polished nickel-bronze round scoriated cover plate with "C.O." cast in cover secured to plug by countersunk screw. Equivalent to Wade W6000 for 2-4" and W7000 for 5-6", except W6000-CM for 2-4" and W7000-CM for 5-6" in carpeted areas. All cleanouts in unfinished floor shall be cast iron with serrated cutoff sections or adjustable housings with bronze or brass internal plug same size as cleanout ferrule and loose set heavy-duty round scoriated cover plate "C.O." cast in cover. Equivalent to Wade W6000X for 2-4" and W7000X for 5-6". Provide ductile iron tractor type cover in areas subjected to wheel traffic. All cleanouts in finished walls shall have cast bronze or brass raised plug and polished nickel-bronze round cover plate secured to plug by countersunk screw. Equivalent to Wade 8590B and 8480R. Cleanouts shall be of Josam, Zurn, Wade, Smith, Watts or Blake manufacturer.
C.
D.
E. 2.
FLOOR DRAINS: A. B. Furnish and install floor drain, where indicated on Drawings, of type listed below. Size of drain shall be the same size as its drain line indicated on Drawings. All above grade drain bodies shall be furnished complete with flashing materials which may be either 16 ounce soft copper, 2 lb./ sq.ft. lead or composite except for shower drains which shall have flashing materials furnished and installed by the General Contractor. The flashing on drain bodies shall extend a minimum of 8" wider in all directions from the drain body. Floor drains specified below are referenced from the Wade catalog. Equivalent drains by Smith, Josam, Watts and Zurn are acceptable. Floor drains (FD-1) on grade and above grade shall be Wade W-1100 with clamping collar and nickel brass top. Provide funnels where shown on the Plans.
C. D. 3.
FREEZEPROOF HYDRANTS: A. Furnish and install non-freeze wall hydrants where shown on the Drawings. Mount the units 2'0" above grade. Josam, Smith, Zurn or Woodford hydrants of comparable design will be accepted. Hydrants must have anti-siphon backflow prevention and renewable seat feature. Provide one key for each key-operated hydrant. 1. Woodford No. 65 or 67 - Rough Brass Finish
PLUMBING
15400 2
4.
DRAIN LINES: A. B. Provide trapped drain lines from the drain pans of all air conditioning units and ventilation system cooling coils to a floor drain. Drain lines shall be PVC.
5.
PLUMBING FIXTURE CONNECTIONS: A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, rough-in sizes for waste, vent and supply connections shall be as follows: Water Closets (Flush Valve) Lavatories Urinals Mop Basins Sinks Electric Water Coolers Showers B. Waste 4" 1" 2" 3" 2" 1" 2" Vent 2" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" Supplies 1" " " " " " "
Securely anchor water lines to shower heads and flush valves by addition of required blocking in wall.
6.
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM: A. The following fixtures are taken mainly from the Kohler Catalog and used to designate type and quality of fixture to be used. American Standard, or Eljer may be used in place of those specified if of a similar type and grade. All supply pipes to flush valves shall be chromium-plated brass pipe, iron pipe size, or be installed using a sweat solder adaptor kit which features a chrome-plated casing tube and chrome-plated wall flange. Flush valves by the Sloan Valve Company are specified. Flush valves by Delany and Zurn are also approved. All exposed flush, waste and supply pipes at the fixtures shall be chromium-plated brass pipe, iron pipe size or chromium-plated copper pipe. The faucets, stop valves, pop-up wastes, etc., shall be heavy cast brass, chromium-plated. Traps shall be 17 gauge brass, chromium-plated. Water lines to each individual fixture, where exposed, shall be equipped with high grade chromium-plated brass stop valves. Fixtures with supplies concealed in cabinet work may have rough brass stops. Brassware will be by the plumbing fixture manufacturer, Symmons, Cambridge Brass, Zurn, The Chicago Faucet Company, T & S Brass, Moen, Grohe, or Delta.
B.
C.
D.
PLUMBING
15400 3
E. F. G. H.
Caulk between the wall and each fixture with silicone sealer. Toilet seats of equivalent grade by fixture manufacturer, Church, Centoco, Sperzel, Beneke, Bemis or Olsonite are approved. Carriers by Wade as specified. Carriers of similar type and grade by Smith, Blake, Josam, Watts and Zurn will be acceptable. Fixtures: 1. WC-1 Water Closet - Kohler 4350 "Wellcomme", ADAABAAG compliant, siphon jet, vitreous china, elongated rim, 14 " above floor, floor set water closet with Kohler No. K-4666-C open front seat less cover with check hinge and Sloan Uppercut model WES-111 dual flush, 1.6 gpf down, 1.1 gpf up flush valve. Offset piping necessary for flush valves to clear ADAABAAG required grab bars. See architectural sheets for location and heights of grab bars. WC-2 Water Closet - Kohler 4350 "Wellcomme", ADAABAAG compliant, siphon jet, vitreous china, elongated rim, 17" above floor, floor set water closet with Kohler No. K-4666-C open front seat less cover with check hinge and Sloan Uppercut model WES-111 dual flush, 1.6 gpf down, 1.1 gpf up flush valve. Flush controls for use by children ages 3-12 years to be 36 maximum above finished floor (ADAABAAG 604.9 and BIA OFMC Design manual). Offset piping necessary for flush valves to clear ADAABAAG required grab bars. See architectural sheets for location and heights of grab bars. UR-1 Urinal Kohler Dexter K-5016-ET, wall hung blow-out jet, vitreous china urinal, Sloan Regal 186-0.5 (.5 gpf) flush valve; hang urinal on Wade W-400 carrier. UR-2 Urinal Kohler Dexter K-5016-ET, ADAABAAG compliant, wall hung blow-out jet, vitreous china urinal, Sloan Regal 186-0.5-XL (.5 gpf) flush valve; hang urinal on Wade W-400 carrier. L-1 Lavatory - Kohler K-2196 "Pennington", ADAABAAG (see Architectural interior elevations sheet for mounting heights) compliant, oval, self-rimming, vitreous china, counter mounted lavatory, "Coralais" K-15598 single handle faucet and grid strainer, 0.5 GPM aerator, 3/8" angle supplies with stops, 17 gauge chromium-plated 1" `P' trap, and lavatory insulation kit.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PLUMBING
15400 4
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO 6. JS-1 Janitor's Sump - Fiat molded stone MSB-2424 receptor with cast brass drain body and No. 302 stainless steel dome strainer. Furnish and install a Chicago Faucet Company #897-VB chrome-plated faucet with wall brace and pail hook. Furnish and install 3-foot length of 5/8" hose on outlet. Furnish and install Fiat Model 832-AA hose hanger and 889-CC mop hanger. Equivalent units by Swan, Zurn, Stern-Williams, Florestone and Mustee acceptable. EWC-1 Electric Water Cooler ADAABAAG compliant wheelchair accessible water cooler. Elkay EZS4 barrier free wall mounted electric water cooler with stainless steel bowl, front and side press bars color coordinated to vinyl cabinet. Color as selected by Architect. Refer to the Mechanical plans for mounting heights of coolers. Where coolers are NOT installed in an alcove provide apron on standard height coolers. Equivalent units by Halsey Taylor, Aqua, and Haws are acceptable if they meet State Plumbing Code criteria for acceptable lead levels in piping and solder joints. SH-1 Shower Shower stall by General Contractor. Shower shall be Bradley 1C-EF-1.5FC with deluxe showerhead with ball joint, 1.5 GPM shower head, standard soap dish, and Equaflow pressure balanced valve with integral stops. Refer to architectural drawings for mounting heights of mixing valves. Showerhead shall be mounted 72 above finished floor. SH-2 Shower - Shower stall by General Contractor. Shower shall be Bradley 1C-6'0"-EF-1.5FC with two 1.5 GPM deluxe shower heads with ball joints (one mounted 6'0" above floor and one mounted 48" above floor), standard soap dish, Equaflow pressure balanced lever handled valve with integral supply stops, and lever operated diverter valve in compliance with ADAABAAG 608.6. Mount shower controls per ADAABAAG 308 and 608 requirements. As applicable to primary user age group(s), mount in accordance with ADAABAAG 308.1 children reach ranges. See architectural plans for users ages.
7.
8.
9.
PLUMBING
15400 5
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO 10. BB-1 Bathbay: Universal Rundle 6200T/6201T Summit 60 TM, ADA compliant, bathbay is a gelcoated, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin, onepiece tub and shower with right-hand drain. Unit measures 60" x 32 3/8" x 78", including 1" mounting flange. Includes fold-down teakwood seat, four factory mounted 1" diameter stainless steel grab bars, two 24" located on back wall, two 24" on wet wall, and two 12" on end wall to meet ANSI N 117.1-86 and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADAABAAG). Unit meets requirements of ANSI Z124.1 for plastic bathing systems. ASTM F462 for slip resistant floor, and HUD UM73A for fire safety with flame spread of less than 75 and smoke generation of less than 450. Grab bars meet requirements of ASTM F466. TEMPTROL ADAAG compliant, Symmons S-96-400-B30 Pressure Balancing mixing valve with combination integral diverter and volume control, and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Tub spout, wall/hand shower with flexible metal hose, inline vacuum breaker wall connection and flange, 30" slide bar for hand shower mounting, shower spray unit shall have an on/off control with non-positive shut-off. Slide bar operation shall not obstruct use of grab bar. Bathbay by Lasxo, Warm Rain, Aquarius and Clarion acceptable. Shower valve by delta, Moen, Powers, Kohler, Zurn and American Standard acceptable. S-1 Sink : Elkay ADAABAAG compliant DRKAD2220 22"x20", 5" deep, 18 gauge, type 302 stainless steel single compartment classroom sink with offset drain opening, ADA compliant Elkay LKE413945RS gooseneck spout with single handle control and 6" 45 restricted swing spout with restricted 1.0 GPM aerator. Sink shall be provided with ADAABAAG Compliant LK-1141A No Lead Flexi-Guard bubbler with push button control that meets ANSI and ADAABAAG requirements on the opposite side of the faucet. Provide LK-35 Duo strainer, P-trap and stops. Mount single handle control on room side of spout. Faucet shall be located on the side of the sink closest to the adjacent side wall. See room layout to determine if sink has faucet on left or right side of sink bowl. Sink by Just is acceptable.
11.
7.
LAVATORY INSULATION KITS: Handicap lavatories that meet ADAABAAG requirements shall have exposed waste and water supply lines insulated. Insulation kit shall be molded vinyl type with minimum 3/16" thickness, nylon fasteners, self-extinguishing characteristics and white or taupe in color. Insulation kit shall include components necessary to cover offset drain (if required), tailpiece, P-trap, waste arm, water supply tubes and water supply stops. Insulation kits by Plumberex (Pro 2000 Series, Pro-Extreme), Handi LavGuard, ProWrap or Trap Wrap. 110 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEM MIXING VALVE A. Furnish and install a Lawler Model 801 High-Low Water Mixer Unit NO. 86510
8.
PLUMBING
15400 6
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO tempering valve. B. Master water mixing valve shall be of the thermostatic type with liquid-filled thermal motor. It shall have bronze body construction with replaceable corrosionresistant components. Valve construction shall employ a sliding piston control mechanism. Sliding piston and liner shall be of stainless steel material. Valve shall come equipped with union end stop and check inlets with removable stainless steel strainers. Valve shall control temperature from a low flow of 1 GPM up to a maximum flow rate for a given pressure differential. Valve shall provide protection against hot or cold supply line failure and thermostat failure. Unit includes shut-off valve on tempered water outlet, 0-200 F dial thermometer and vacuum breaker. Unit is assembled and tested with necessary fittings and nipples. Finish shall be bronze and the valve shall have a temperature range of 90 to 120F. Valve shall have a flow capacity range from 1 GPM to 40 GPM with a 30 PSI pressure drop. Valve by Encon or other prior approved equivalent is acceptable. Prior approved equivalents acceptable.
C.
D. E. F. 9.
DOMESTIC WATER RECIRCULATING PUMPS: A. Taco No. 110B all bronze circulator capable of circulating 10 GPM at 7 ft.hd. with 1/12 HP 120-1-60 motor. Equivalent by B & G, Amtrol and Armstrong are acceptable.
10.
WATER HEATER: A. Furnish and install a residential, Energy Saver, glass-lined tank, storage type, electric water heater as shown and scheduled on the Drawings and specified herein. The unit shall be complete with T&P relief valve, foam insulation, enameled metal outer jacket, magnesium anode and automatic controls. Pipe outlet of relief valve to floor drain. Equivalent units by Ruud, Rheem, State, A.O. Smith and Bradford-White acceptable.
B. 11.
SPACE SAVER SS-1: A. B. Guy Gray FBB-200TS with 1/2" H & CW valve, and 2" drain for top supply, B-200 for bottom supply. Provide Sioux Chief, or equivalent, Mini-rester model 660-SB for hot and cold
PLUMBING
15400 7
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO water connections.
12.
SHOCK ARRESTERS: A. Shock arrestors shown in the plumbing piping riser diagrams are Wade "Shokstop" Series W. Equivalent units by Zurn, Amtrol, Sioux Chief, J.R. Smith, Blake and Josam or approved equivalent acceptable. Provide Sioux Chief or equivalent "Mini-caster" model 660-SB for hot and cold water connections to washing machine.
B.
PART 3 EXECUTION 1. PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT: A. Where equipment or material is received and stored prior to installation, adequate protection from weather, vandalism and incidental construction damage shall be provided. The Contractor shall repair or replace equipment/material damaged during receipt, storage or installation.
B. 2.
INSTALLATION: A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work in complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Review manufacturers installation instructions for material and equipment to be installed and follow same. If there is conflict between the manufacturers installation instructions and the CORs drawings, consult the COR for determination of proper installation procedures. END OF SECTION 15400
B.
PLUMBING
15400 8
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15500 FIRE PROTECTION -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1. GENERAL: A. This Section together with applicable Paragraphs of Section 15010 forms the Specifications which essentially outlines work to be accomplished by the "Fire Protection" Contractor for this project.
2.
SCOPE OF WORK: A. The work covered by these Specifications and the attached Drawings shall consist of a combination wet and dry system for the dormitory building in the project. The unheated attic space in the dormitory will be required to be sprinklered with a dry system. Everything necessary for the complete and successful operation of this system, whether or not definitely specified on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed as if specified or indicated. Fire protection system shall be furnished and installed to meet the minimum requirements listed in NFPA 13 and NFPA 5000.
B.
C. 3.
INSPECTION TESTS: A. All inspections, examinations and tests required by the Authorities and Agencies specified shall be arranged and paid for by the Fire Protection Contractor as necessary to obtain complete and final acceptance of the Fire Protection System. Above Ground Piping. 1. All new above ground sprinkler piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 PSI with no loss in pressure for a minimum of 2 hours. Piping between exterior fire department connection and the check valve in the fire department inlet pipe shall be hydrostatically tested in the same manner. Dry pipe system shall also have an air pressure leakage test in addition to the hydrostatic test. Air test shall be performed at 40 PSI for a period of 24 hours. If leakage allows a loss in pressure of 1 1/2 PSI in a 24-hour period, it shall be corrected.
B.
2.
FIRE PROTECTION
15500 1
3.
Operational tests shall be conducted as required in NFPA 13 and the Test Certificate for Underground Piping shall be provided as required by NFPA 24, 10.10.1, through the Contracting Officer to the Division of Safety and Risk Management, prior to scheduling the final inspection. On completion of the required tests, the Contractor shall complete the "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Above Ground Piping" contained in NFPA 13 and submit copies to the Owner, COR, Local Fire Chief , ISO Commercial Risk Services, Inc. and Division of Safety & Risk Management (AJH)
4.
4.
GUARANTEE: A. The entire Fire Protection installation, as specified under this Section of the Specifications, shall be guaranteed for one (1) year against defective equipment, materials and workmanship. The liability of the Fire Protection Contractor under this guarantee is limited to repair or replacement of fire protection defective equipment, materials or workmanship. The guarantee period is to begin on the date the equipment is placed in operation at the Owner's request for his convenience or from the date a successful acceptance test is made, whichever occurs first. The guarantee shall not be construed as requiring the Fire Protection Contractor to render service or maintenance required in the normal operation of the equipment or to make repairs that may be needed due to normal wear and tear or the Owner's negligence, abuse or breakage.
B.
5.
PERMITS: A. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included in this section, which are required by any of the Authorities or Agencies having jurisdiction, shall be obtained and paid for by the Fire Protection Contractor.
6.
WORKING PLANS: A. Before commencing sprinkler installation, the Fire Protection Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings with shall include working plans, including complete hydraulic calculations to the Authorities and Agencies specified and to the Consulting Engineer for review and approval. The working plans shall include all information required by NFPA 13 Plans and Calculations section. Submit eight (8) copies of the Working Plans plus one set of Reproducible Plans in the shop drawing submittal.
B.
FIRE PROTECTION
15500 2
C.
Submit three (3) sets of sprinkler system shop drawings, hydraulic calculations, or pipe schedule calculations and data reflecting compliance to NFPA 13, 11.2.2, manufacturers equipment data sheets, and all related documents through the Contracting Officer to Division of Safety and Risk Management (AHJ) for review and approval prior to installation. Working plans, including the 46 items of NFPA 13, Chapter 22, as applicable, are to be included. (25 IAM, Topic 26.6.A.4). Where conflicts exist between structural elements, ductwork, or other obstacles and the sprinkler piping, the Fire Protection Contractor shall make adjustments to the Plans to resolve those conflicts.
D.
7.
QUALIFICATIONS OF SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR: A. The Contractor for the Fire Protection installation shall be a qualified Fire Protection Contractor regularly engaged in the installation of Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems and other Fire Protection Equipment. Fire Protection Contractor shall have been in the fire sprinkler installation business for a minimum of two (2) years.
B. 8.
AUTHORITIES AND AGENCIES: A. All work will be installed for the approval and acceptance of the following: Insurance Services Office Division of Safety & Risk Management (AJH)
9.
DESIGN AND INSTALLATION STANDARDS: A. B. C. The Fire Protection System shall be designed and installed to comply with the following Standards and\or Codes of the latest issue: N.F.P.A. Pamphlet No. 13 - Sprinkler Systems and No. 14 - Hose Standpipes. Pipe sizing shall be based on NFPA-13 Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Pipe Schedule. At the Contractor's option, the system may be hydraulically calculated if submitted with substantiating data. Refer to the civil plans for water tower location, water tower height, underground main pipe sizes and water main pipe lengths to assist in determining flow rates and pressure available.
D.
FIRE PROTECTION
15500 3
E.
This building is classified as Ordinary Hazard, Group 2. This would require a minimum design density of .2 GPM and minimum design area of 1,500 square feet for Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 occupancy plus 250 GPM allowance for Hose Stream.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. SPRINKLER HEADS: A. B. Sprinkler heads shall be flush pendent with white cover plate in finished areas and rough brass upright or pendent as required in unfinished areas. Different type sprinkler heads shall be installed where shown on the shop drawings. Sprinkler heads shall be permanently marked with a manufacturer symbol as per NFPA 13. Listed quick response sprinklers shall be used in the dormitory sleeping rooms (NFPA 5000, 74.3,5,7) Provide cabinet with sprinkler wrench and spare heads as required by code. Location of sprinkler heads shall be as shown on the shop drawings and shall be placed in the center of the ceiling tiles and shall avoid lights, ceiling grid, and other devices mounted in the ceiling tiles.
C. D.
2.
MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, VALVES AND DEVICES: A. All material, equipment, valves and devices, installed or furnished under this Section, shall be listed or approved for use in the Fire Protection installation by the Authorities, Agencies, Codes and Standards named in this Section of the Specification. 1. 2. Underwriter's Laboratories - Approved Fire Protection Equipment List Factory Mutual Approved Equipment Manual
3.
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: A. Pipe and fittings installed above ground shall comply with NFPA 13, Chapter 6. Materials not depicted in Chapter 6 tables shall be listed for fire protection service and shall be submitted for approval through the Contracting Officer to the Division of Safety and Risk Management with the fire protection and sprinkler shop drawing submittal.
4.
DRAINS: A. Systems drains and auxiliary drains shall be run to properly trapped sewer connection.
FIRE PROTECTION
15500 4
5.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION: A. Shall be equivalent to Elkhart Figure #166 flush type chrome-plated with Pueblo Pintado Fire Department threads. Potter Roemer connection is acceptable.
6.
AUDIBLE VISUAL ALARMS: A. B. Equivalent to Faraday model AC-6117 with Number 3015, " surface mounting plate. Strobe/horn unit shall be weatherproof, UL listed, feature a Xenon flash, have high impact white/exam lens with 1.2" high red letters. Strobe candle power shall be 15.0 effective and 135,000 peak. Horn output shall be 87 dB minimum, 95 dBA typical. Unit shall be designed for surface mounting and be rated for 120 VAC. Turn over audio visual alarm to the Electrical Contractor for wiring.
C. D. 7.
BACKFLOW PREVENTION: A. For wet or dry systems, provide double check valve backflow preventer equivalent to Watts No. 709. Assembly must be furnished with UL/FM approved O.S.&Y. gate valve on inlet and outlet and assembly must meet A.S.S.E. Standard No. 1015. Dual contact, tamper proof switches shall be provided in both O.S.&Y. gate valves. Where systems have glycol/water solution in them, a reduced pressure backflow preventer equivalent to Watts No. 909 Series shall be installed with UL/FM approved O.S.&Y. gate valves on inlet and outlet. Assembly must meet requirements of A.S.S.E. Standard No. 1013.
B.
8.
PLATES: A. Provide ceiling plates on pipe, which passes through walls, ceilings, and\or floors.
9.
SLEEVES: A. Provide sleeves for all riser and Fire Department connection.
10.
BUSHINGS: A. The use of any bushings of any type to obtain reduction in size in fittings will not be acceptable.
FIRE PROTECTION
15500 5
11.
HANGERS: A. Pipe rings to be malleable one piece or swivel type. All hangers to be approved Underwriter's type.
12.
WORK NOT INCLUDED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS: A. B. C. D. E. Painting. Wiring by Electrical Contractor. Water Service into Building. Exterior Fire Protection Mains. Fire Hydrants.
PART 3 EXECUTION 1. PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT: A. B. NFPA 25, Standard for the Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire protection Systems, must be provided at or before the final inspection. Where equipment or material is received and stored prior to installation, adequate protection from weather, vandalism and incidental construction damage shall be provided. The Contractor shall repair or replace equipment/material damaged during receipt, storage or installation.
C. 2.
INSTALLATION: A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work in complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Review manufacturers installation instructions for material and equipment to be installed and follow same. If there is conflict between the manufacturers installation instructions and the CORs drawings, consult the COR for determination of proper installation procedures.
B.
FIRE PROTECTION
15500 6
3.
INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNERS: A. Before final payment is made, when equipment has been placed in permanent operation, instruct operating personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment. Furnish Owner with written operating and maintenance instructions in a reasonable number of copies as determined by the Owner. Such instructions shall be pictorial and graphical insofar as practical.
4.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST: A. Final acceptance test shall begin only when the Preliminary Test Report has been approved. The BIA Division of Safety and Risk Management shall be provided notification through the Contracting Officer, to attend the system testing. The Contractors Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct the Final Acceptance Test and shall provide a complete demonstration of the operation of the system. This shall include operation of control valves and flowing of inspectors test connections to verify operation of associated water flow alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, the main drain test shall be repeated to assure that control valves are in the open position. In addition, the contractors representative shall have available copies of as-built drawings and certificates of tests previously conducted. The installation shall not be considered accepted until identified discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation is properly completed and received. END OF SECTION 15500
FIRE PROTECTION
15500 7
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15650 HEAT PUMP SYSTEM -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1. SCOPE OF WORK: A. B. The work covered under Section 15650 includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment and materials necessary for a complete water source heat pump system. Related work covered in other Sections are as follows: Pipe and Fittings Valves and Specialties Insulation 2. SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted on the equipment covered under this Section as per Paragraph 15010-09. Section 15050 Section 15100 Section 15180
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. CONCRETE BASES: A. Bases under the mechanical equipment shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor but this Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the General Contractor as to size and location.
2.
AIR VENTS: A. Install coin or screwdriver operated manual air vents on air chamber at the high point of all piping.
3.
THERMOMETERS: A. Furnish and install, where shown in piping, TEL-TRU industrial Model BC-350R, bi-metallic thermometer with 4" stem, 1/2" NPT connection, and Type TW4 bulb well as manufactured by TEL-TRU, U.S. Gauge Co., H.O. Trerice Company, Welksler, Weiss, Wika, Winters, Moeller or approved equal. Install thermometers so that they are visible when standing on the floor.
HEAT PUMP SYSTEM
15650 1
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO B. 4. 25-125 degree F. range heat pump piping.
PRESSURE GAUGES: A. Furnish and install, where shown in piping, Mechanical Contractor's pressure or vacuum gauges equal to Type P5105 pressure or V5105 vacuum gauges as manufactured by U.S. Gauge or approved equal. Dial size to be 4 inch. Gauges by Marsh, Weksler, Weiss, Wika, Winter's, Moeller and Trerice are acceptable. Install gauges so that they are visible when standing on floor. Verify range of gauges with COR prior to ordering. Furnish and install, on the inlet and discharge to each pump, or as detailed on the drawings, a pressure gauge as described above. Range of gauges shall be selected so they operate near mid-scale at normal pump operation. Range for pump gauges shall be 0-100 psig on discharge, 0-60 psig before and after suction diffuser. If Pump Detail shows a single gauge per pump, use 0-100 psig range.
B.
C.
5.
SPECIALTIES: A. Furnish and install a Bell and Gossett No. B7-12 pressure reducing valve together with a Watts No. 009 QT reduced pressure backflow preventer with Series 909AG air gap fittings on the cold water fill line to each air purger. Furnish and install pressurized diaphragm type expansion tanks where shown and as scheduled on the Drawings. Tanks shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure of 125 PSIG and bear the ASME stamp. The sealed elastomer diaphragm shall be suitable for an operating temperature of up to 240 deg.F. The tanks shall be furnished with a ring stand for vertical floor mounting. Air purger on heat pump system shall be an Amtrol No.462, 6 inch size. Pipe cold water fill into bottom of heat pump system air purger and install a float type automatic air vent (No. 706) with ball valve on top of air purger, suitable for system operating pressure. Air purgers, bladder type expansion tanks and pressure reducing valves by Taco, Armstrong, Wessels, Wilkens and B & G are acceptable. Backflow preventers by Conbraco, Hersey and Wilkens are acceptable.
B.
C.
D. E. 6.
TERMINAL UNIT VALVING: A. Refer to Section 15100, Valves and Specialties, for shutoff and balance valve requirements.
HEAT PUMP SYSTEM
15650 2
7.
BASE MOUNTED PUMPS: A. Base mounted pumps shall be flexible coupled, frame mounted, bronze fitted, ceramic seal of vertical split case rear pullout design with ball bearings. Tapped gauge openings shall be provided at suction and discharge nozzles. Pumps shall be able to operate under temperatures and pressures of up to 250F and 125 PSIG respectively. Equivalent pumps by Armstrong, B & G and Thrush will be acceptable. Motors shall be 1750 RPM open, drip-proof with built-in overload protection. Motors shall be provided of sufficient size so as to be non-overloading at a water flow rate 50% above specified flow. Motors 5 HP and over shall be high efficiency. When setting base mounted pumps, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to have the concrete bases poured so that the concrete fills the void under the pump base plate. After pump installation, this Contractor shall check the alignment of the pump and motor per manufacturers instructions and realign the motor and pump to acceptable tolerances. Metal shims shall be used to shim the motor to the correct alignment. This Contractor shall remove grease plugs and install grease fittings on the motor and add grease as recommended by the pump manufacturer. Pumps shall be installed as per Manufacturers Installation Instructions. Pump sizes and capacities are as scheduled on the Drawings.
B.
C.
D.
E. 8.
NON METALLIC FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS: A. Provide non-metallic pump connectors in the base mounted pump suction and discharge piping. Connectors on pipes up to and including 8" size shall be Twin City Hose, Inc., Model M-S-2. Connectors shall consist of plate steel, 150# flanges, and neoprene/nylon double bellows body. Connectors shall be designed for a maximum positive working pressure of 135 PSIG, maximum negative working pressure of 26" HG, and temperatures of 20F to 240F. Connectors shall allow a lateral deflection of 1", an extension of 1", a compression of 2" and angular deflection of 35 degrees. Equivalent Flexible connectors shall be as manufactured by Metra Flex. Approved equivalent flexible connectors will be acceptable.
B.
HEAT PUMP SYSTEM
15650 3
9.
HYDRONIC HEAT PUMPS( GEOTHERMAL): A. Equipment shall be completely assembled, piped, internally wired and test operated at the factory. It shall be both UL listed for safety and ISO-ARI 13256-1 listed for Water Loop Heat Pump, Ground Water Heat Pump and Ground Loop Heat Pump applications and labeled prior to leaving the factory. Service and caution area labels shall also be placed on the unit in their appropriate locations. The units shall be provided with the optional factory installed extended range package designed to operate with entering fluid temperatures between 50F and 110F in cooling and between 25F and 80F in heating. The cabinet shall be fabricated from heavy-gauge steel finished with an aluminum-zinc alloy with a clear acrylic coating for additional corrosion protection. The interior shall be insulated with (12.7mm) thick, multi density, coated, glass fiber. All units shall allow sufficient service access to replace the compressor without unit removal. One blower and two compressor compartment access panels shall be removable with supply and return ductwork in place. A duct collar shall be provided on the supply air opening. A 2" return air filter rack/duct collar with 1" thick filters shall be provided with each unit. The units shall have an insulated divider panel between the air handling section and the compressor section to minimize the transmission of compressor noise, and to permit service testing without air bypass. Units shall have a stainless steel condensate drain pan.
B.
C.
HEAT PUMP SYSTEM
15650 4
D.
Units shall utilize refrigerant R-410A. All units shall contain a sealed refrigerant circuit including a hermetic compressor, capillary tube metering device with strainer or balance port expansion valve, refrigerant drier, finned tube air-to refrigerant heat exchanger, refrigerant reversing valve and service ports. Compressor shall be high efficiency, designed for heat pump duty, internally spring isolated for maximum sound attenuation and mounted on rubber vibration isolators. Compressor motors shall be equipped with overload protection. Refrigerant reversing valves shall be pilot operated sliding piston type with replaceable encapsulated magnetic coils energized only during the cooling cycle. The finned tube coil shall be constructed of lanced aluminum fins not exceeding fourteen fins per inch bonded to rifled copper tubes in a staggered pattern not less than three rows deep and have a 450 PSIG working pressure. Coils shall have a baked polyester enamel coating for protection against most air bourn chemicals. The coil shall have aluminum end sheets. The coaxial water-to-refrigerant heat exchanger shall be constructed of a convoluted copper or optional cupro-nickel inner tube and steel outer tube with a designed refrigerant working pressure of 600 PSIG and designed water side working pressure of no less than 400 PSIG. An optional extended range package shall include a bi-flow balanced port expansion valve metering device in place of capillary tubes and insulated water to refrigerant heat exchanger. The fan shall be direct drive centrifugal forward curved type with a dynamically balanced wheel. The housing and wheel shall be designed for quiet low velocity operation. The fan housing shall be removable from the unit without disconnecting the supply air ductwork for servicing of the fan motor. The fan motor shall be three speed PSC type for direct drive units and single speed for belt drive units. The motor shall be permanently lubricated and have thermal overload protection.
E.
HEAT PUMP SYSTEM
15650 5
F.
Controls and safety devices will be factory wired and mounted within the unit. Controls shall include fan relay, compressor contactor, 24V transformer, reversing valve coil and solid state lockout controller (UPM) The UPM controller shall include the following features: Anti-short cycle time delay, random start, brown out/surge/power interruption protection, 120 second low pressure switch bypass timer, shutdown on high or low refrigerant pressure safety switch inputs, sensors, 24 VAC alarm output for remote fault indication, unit reset at thermostat or disconnect, ability to defeat time delays for servicing and automatic intelligent reset. The UPM shall automatically reset after a safety shut down and restart the unit, if the cause of the shut down no longer exists, after the anti-short cycle and random start timers expire. Should a fault re-occur within 60 minutes after reset, then a permanent lockout will occur. A light emitting diode (LED) shall annunciate the following alarms: high refrigerant pressure, low refrigerant pressure, low water temperature and a high level of condensate in the drain pan. The LED will display each fault condition as soon as the fault occurs. If a permanent lockout occurs, then the fault LED will display the type of fault until the unit is reset. Safety devices include a low pressure cutout set a 20 PSIG for loss of charge protection and a high pressure cutout control set at 600 PSIG. An optional energy management relay that allows unit control by an external source shall be factory installed. A terminal block with screw terminals shall be provided for control wiring. Furnish heat pumps with flexible hose kit Option No.4 on the return side, consisting of fire rated, fiber reinforced EPDM stainless steel braid hose with swivel connections, ball valve, Ultramatic automatic flow control valve selected for the correct flow and UltraY Y-strainer with drain valve and pressure temperature test ports and flexible hose kit Option No. 1 flexible hose on the supply side of the heat pump, consisting of fire rated, fiber reinforced EPDM stainless steel braid hose with swivel connections. Ball valves supply side ball valve to be furnished by the Contractor. Supply, return water and condensate drain connections shall be brass female pipe thread fittings and mounted flush to cabinet exterior with stainless steel, braided hose kit with swivel connectors. Unit shall be nameplated to accept HACR circuit breaker for branch circuit current protection. Units shall be provided with 1" thick disposable fiberglass filters. Provide a minimum of two additional changes for each unit. The Mechanical Contractor shall change out the first set when the building is turned over to the Owner.
G.
H.
I. J.
HEAT PUMP SYSTEM
15650 6
K.
After the system has been placed in operation, the manufacturers representative shall make a field trip to check out the system and verify the proper operation of the heat pump units. This shall include refrigeration circuit and control circuits. Manufacturers representative startup services shall include report submittal to Engineer. Minimum items verified shall include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Proper refrigerant valve operation. Verify reversing valve operation. Verify heating operation. Verify cooling operation. Measure actual voltage and full load amperage of each compressor. Verify suction and discharge pressures in heating and cooling.
L. M.
Units shall be provided with a 1 year warranty for all parts, defects in materials and workmanship and a 5-year warranty shall be provided on the compressor. Geothermal heat pumps shown and scheduled on the drawings are by Florida Heat Pump. Equivalent heat pumps by Trane, Climate Master, McQuay, Mammoth, Econair, Hydron, and Water Furnace are acceptable if they meet the performance in the schedule.
10.
GLYCOL: A. The Prime Mechanical Contractor, after the geothermal building heat pump system and well field have been operating on water for a minimum of 10 days, shall add sufficient Dow Chemical DOWFROST Propylene Glycol to the water to provide a 25% solution in the geothermal heat pump system. These percentages are based on system solution volume. A 25% solution shall have a minimum 15 freeze point. Glycol shall be of the industrial type suitable for HVAC applications and contain an inhibitor to prevent corrosion caused by glycol degradation. Automotive type formulations are not acceptable. Water used to dilute the glycol shall not exceed the following concentrations: Chlorides, 25 ppm; Sulfates, 25 ppm; Calcium, 50 ppm; Magnesium, 50 ppm. Total hardness should be less than 100 ppm. If any of the above categories are exceeded, the Contractor shall use a factory premixed water/glycol solution or obtain distilled or deionized water to dilute the glycol to the strength specified. After the glycol water solution is circulated for a minimum of 10 hours, the
B.
C.
D.
HEAT PUMP SYSTEM
15650 7
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO Contractor shall test the solution for freeze point and reserve alkalinity (inhibitor level). The fluid analysis kit shall be obtained from the manufacturer of the glycol. In lieu of the self-test kit, the Contractor may send a sample to the manufacturer for analysis. A copy of the report shall be furnished to the Construction Manager and the Contracting Officer. E. F. If reserve alkalinity is lower than recommended by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall add sufficient inhibitor to obtain minimum recommended level of protection. The Mechanical Contractor will leave the Owner with one additional full 55-gallon drum of propylene glycol.
B. 2.
INSTALLATION: A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work in complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Review manufacturers installation instructions for material and equipment to be installed and follow same. If there is conflict between the manufacturers installation instructions and the CORs drawings, consult the COR for determination of proper installation procedures. END OF SECTION 15650
B.
HEAT PUMP SYSTEM
15650 8
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1. SCOPE OF WORK: A. This Section, together with applicable paragraphs of Section 15010, essentially outlines the labor, equipment and materials necessary for a complete ventilation system as shown on the Drawings and herein specified. This Section and each of the Sections to which it applies is subject to the requirements of Division 0 and Division 1 of these complete Specifications. Provide Shop Drawings on material and equipment in this Section as per Division 1. Shall comply with NFPA 90A and 90B. Shall comply with NFPA 5000.
B. C. D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. SHEET METAL DUCTS (RECTANGULAR LOW PRESSURE): A. All low pressure rectangular ductwork, except as noted on the Drawings or in the Specifications, shall be of galvanized sheet steel. Duct construction, duct joints, duct seams, locks, etc., shall be in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, latest edition. Ducts shall conform to dimensions on the Drawings unless location of structural members prohibit. In case of a change in dimension, cross-sectional areas shall be maintained. All ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with finished joints. No inside standing seams will be permitted in ductwork. All rectangular ductwork shall be cross-broken in sheet width sizes 18" and larger. No single thickness partitions shall be allowed between ducts. Changes in size throughout shall be of perfect rectangular cross sections with a slope of approximately 1 to 4. Abrupt changes or offsets will not be accepted. The COR reserves the right to make minor changes in run of certain ducts without extra cost to the Owner if necessary to avoid unforeseen structural or other interferences.
B.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 1
C.
All low pressure ductwork shall be constructed to SMACNA 2" pressure class unless noted otherwise. The COR reserves the right to order any open seams or joints made tight by caulking or taping. No open joints at corners or elsewhere will be allowed. All vertical ducts or risers shall be self-supporting. Where space permits, elbows shall have a centerline radius equal to 1 times their width. Shorter radius and square throat elbows shall be used where required to fit restricted areas only and where required by the duct connection details on the Drawings. All short radius and square throat elbows shall be provided with turning vanes. All ducts shall be substantially supported with hangers to the ceiling or otherwise, depending upon local conditions, placing supports not over 8 feet apart along the length of the duct. All hangers shall be made of 1" wide galvanized iron strips of 16 gauge riveted or bolted to sides of duct. The upper ends of hangers shall be securely fastened to ceiling or masonry by means of expansion shields or concrete inserts. Ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with the following schedule: Up to 12" Width to 30" Width to 60" Width to 90" Width Width and Up 26 Gauge 24 Gauge 22 Gauge 20 Gauge 18 Gauge
D.
E.
F.
All right elbows shall be provided with proper size Tuttle and Bailey "Ducturns" or equivalent. Ducts and plenums over 60" shall be reinforced with 1" x 1 x 1/8" steel angles. On all ductwork with perimeter greater than 120", the "Ductmate" connection system shall be used to join ducts. Where this system is utilized, the duct seams and connections do not have to have duct sealer applied. Ductmate shall be fabricated from 20 gauge galvanized steel and be joined with No. 440 tape between joints. Ductwork shall be run as high as possible in all rooms to maintain proper headroom. Where two or more ducts cross each other, they must be arranged in such a manner as to maintain the greatest possible clearance underneath. The Ventilating Contractor shall not cover any electrical outlets or junction boxes. This Contractor shall consult with the Plumbing, Heating, Temperature Control and Electrical Contractors to avoid interference with piping runs, etc. All ductwork, where internal insulation is to be applied, shall be increased in size so the net internal dimension is that indicated on the Drawings.
G.
H.
I.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 2
J.
Watertight drip pans shall be provided below all power vent, relief vent, gravity vent, fresh air and exhaust openings through roof, either built into the ductwork or, if no duct is installed, independently suspended below opening. All fresh air, exhaust air and relief air louver plenums shall have watertight seams on bottom portion of plenums. All fresh air ductwork and other ductwork, as noted on the Plans, shall be caulked watertight.
2.
SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS: A. All round ducts shall be zinc-coated steel of spiral lockseam construction by Norlock, Semco, Fabricated Duct Systems, Wesco, Spiral Manufacturing, United Sheet Metal Company, CAM Spiral, or equivalent. Round ducts shall be cut to the length on the job and assembled with matched slip fittings of United Sheet Metal Company, Norlock, Semco, CAM Spiral, or equivalent. 3"-14" Diameter 15"-26" Diameter 28"-36" Diameter 38"-50" Diameter 52"-60" Diameter 61"and Above B. 26 Gauge 24 Gauge 22 Gauge 20 Gauge 18 Gauge 16 Gauge
Connections of ducts to fittings shall be made with a synthetic rubber sealing compound similar to Minnesota Mining EC-800 or EC-750 and mechanically fastened with screws. In lieu of sealing compound, the duct joints may be sealed with a wrap of SMACNA approved duct tape applied after the fitting has been screwed to the duct.
3.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: A. Flexible connections shall be provided on inlet and outlet of all fans and air handling units. Connections shall be a 20-oz woven glass fabric double coated with neoprene similar to "Vent Glass". Fabric shall be waterproof and fire retardant. Ductmate PRO Flex or Duro Dyne equivalent will be acceptable. Use 1" x 1" x 1/8" angles to clamp the duct fabric to the ductwork, fan section and fan discharge openings and to the fans or air handlers. Use 5/16 stove bolts or selftapping screws on approximately 6" centers. Use #14 gauge l" wide bands to bolt fabrics to round openings. These connections shall not be less than 6" wide and shall be made with slack in the fabric. Flexible connections may be eliminated from the inlet and outlet of fan housings that have the entire fan and motor assembly isolated for vibration.
B.
C.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 3
4.
DAMPERS: A. Balancing Dampers: Install volume or splitter dampers where shown on the Drawings. Dampers shall be fitted with adjustable quadrants or regulators. Quadrants shall be plainly marked to indicate position of damper. All dampers will be tight fitting and reinforced to prevent vibration. Quadrants shall be Ventlok No. 555 or 635, 3/8" square rod quadrants. Use No. 605 or 607 end bearing as required. Use No. 637, 638 or 639 elevated regulators for ducts with external insulation. Backdraft Dampers: Furnish and install, in ductwork to all power roof ventilators and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings, aluminum, counter-balanced backdraft dampers. Dampers shall be multi-bladed with gasketed edges of felt or polyurethane foam for noiseless operation. Dampers shall be Arrow Type 500-ACB or Vent Products Model 3100 with blade-to-blade linkage and adjustable counterweight or equivalent by Cesco, Penn, Greenheck, Venco, Nailor Industries, Air Balance, Ruskin or Safe Air. Automatic Dampers: These dampers, except as identified below, are to be furnished under the Automatic Temperature Control Paragraph of this Division. Dampers so furnished, but which are to field-mounted, shall be carefully installed by this Contractor. Fire Dampers: Walls, floors and partitions with fire resistance ratings of one (1) hour or greater but less than three (3) hours shall be protected with 1 hour rated fire dampers. Equipped with 212 fusible links. Furnish and install dynamic rated folding blade steel curtain fire dampers, Greenheck DFD-150, vertical or horizontal as required. Dampers shall be certified under the UL555 (sixth edition) standard and shall be UL listed. Fire dampers shall be rated for 2,000 fpm airflow and 4 in. wg and shall meet minimum testing requirements of 2,400 fpm and 4.5 in. wg per the UL 555 standard. Fire dampers shall be tested for airflow in either direction as per the UL 555 standard. Fire dampers shall also meet requirements of NFPA 90A, and have a fire rating of 1 hours which shall be indicated by a label attached to the unit. Units shall have a frame extension so that when retracted the blades are out of the air stream. Where dampers are installed in vertical air flow positions, they shall be provided with stainless steel closure springs and cam-type blade locks to assure complete damper blade closure. Dampers shall be able to be reset without removal from the duct. This Contractor shall install 20 gauge sleeves where fire dampers pass through walls. This Contractor shall furnish and install hinged access doors unless dampers can be reset through grille or diffuser outlet. Equivalent dampers by Phillips, Ruskin, Vent Products, National Controlled Air, Prefco, Venco, Pottorff, Air Balance, Nailor Industries, Cesco and Safe Air will be acceptable. 1. Unless specified otherwise, fire damper frame shall be Type B with blades out of the air stream.
B.
C.
D.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 4
2. E.
Fire dampers behind grilles shall have Type A frame with blades in the air stream.
Combination Fire/Smoke dampers: Furnish and install, where shown, combination fire/smoke dampers, Greenheck, Inc. Model FSD 211 with factory furnished sleeve and actuator. Dampers shall meet NFPA 90A requirements and carry UL555S or UL555C (July 2002) 1 hour fire resistant rating, 250F. elevated temperature rating and UL555 Class I leakage rating. Dampers shall fail closed on loss of power and shall be interfaced with smoke detectors to close when smoke is detected. Unit shall consist of butterfly type damper blades in the air stream, externally mounted actuator, stainless steel closure spring, bronze iolite bearings, operator linkage and 16" minimum length sleeve with operator shaft extended through sleeve for connection to damper motor. Damper will close if power is interrupted to damper motor. Furnish and install hinged access doors in the ducts, whether shown on the Drawings or not, for the inspection and service of each smoke damper. Equivalent dampers by Phillips, Ruskin, Vent Products, National Controlled Air, Nailor Industries, Pottorff, Air Balance, Cesco, Venco, Safe Air and Prefco will be acceptable. 1. Electrically actuated dampers shall be furnished with Belimo FSNF-120, 120 VAC-1P actuator and RRL (Resetable Heat Responsive Device). The heat sensor, set at 165F, will interrupt power to the actuator allowing the spring return mechanism to close. A reset button at the sensor will reset damper position.
5.
ACCESS DOORS: A. Furnish and install access doors where shown on the Drawings. In addition, whether shown on the Plans or not, install an access door to allow inspection of each fire damper or smoke damper not accessible by removal of a register or diffuser. Doors shall be complete with hinges and cam locks and shall open outward. Access doors for fire dampers shall have a label with letters not less than " in height reading "Fire Damper". Unless noted to be of different size on the Drawings, each access door shall be 12" x 12", Air Balance, Inc. Model FSA100 with 1" thick insulation. Equivalent units by Cesco, Kees, Air Balance, Nailor Industries, Vent Products, Safe Air or Phillips are acceptable. Ductmate "sandwich" doors in 12" x 8" size will be acceptable. Access doors at humidifiers shall be Air Balance Model FSA100-G-1", or equivalent, hinged with glass see-thru port hole, 3" min. dia.
B.
C. D.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 5
6.
DUCT SEALER: A. B. All exhaust air, supply air, mixed air and fresh air ductwork shall have joints sealed with mastic. Acceptable sealers include Durodyne S-2, Permatite (Class II), 3M Duct Sealer 800 or 3M Duct Sealer 900.
7.
CONCRETE BASES: A. Bases under mechanical equipment shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor, but this Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the General Contractor as to size and location.
8.
HIGH EFFICIENCY TAKE OFFS: A. All round take-offs, where connections are made to flexible duct, shall be made with high efficiency rectangular openings with 45 degree slope on body, rectangle to round transition with built-in volume damper as manufactured by Sheet Metal Connectors Inc. Equivalent fittings by other manufacturers will be acceptable.
B. 9.
AIR FILTER GAGES: A. B. C. Gages shall be Dwyer Magnehelic Gages, Catalog No. 2001-AF, with a range of 0 to 1.0 inches of water. Each gage shall be installed with necessary stops and tubing. Install gauges as follows: Across the all ventilation system fresh air and exhaust air filter boxes. Do not install across heat pump filter boxes. Equivalent gages by Orange Research are acceptable.
10.
AIR DUCT THERMOMETERS: A. Air duct thermometers shall be Trerice, Catalog No. B83204, bi-metal, dial thermometers with 3" stainless steel case, 4" stem length, No. 065-0015, 3" O.D. flange for duct mounting. Thermometer range -40F to 160o F. Install thermometers as follows: On the discharge of all fresh air and exhaust air ducts leaving the heat recovery units and on the mixed air ductwork serving the gymnasium heat pumps. Equivalent thermometers by Tel-Tru, Weiss, Wika, Weksler, or U.S. Gauge are acceptable.
B.
C.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 6
11.
FLEXIBLE HOSE: A. Insulated flexible duct used in low pressure heating/cooling applications shall be Thermaflex, Type M-KE, UL 181, Class 1, air duct constructed of polymeric liner bonded to corrosion-resistant steel wire helix, fiberglass insulating blanket and outer vapor barrier of fiberglass reinforced metallized film laminate. Wiremold Type WK, ATCO UPC 90, Flexmaster III, Hart & Cooley F194, Quietflex 40 Series, or Certainteed equivalent are acceptable. Flexible hose shall be sealed to the spin-in take-off and neck of the diffuser or air device with duct tape and secured with a Thermaflex "Duct Strap" or radiator type hose clamp. Each flexible hose shall be run in a length not to exceed 5'.
B.
12.
CLOTHES DRYER BOOSTER FAN: A. Exterior wall-mount fan by Fantech designed for dryer boosting with the addition of a pressure sensing switch. Fan shall be a model RVF 4XL rated at 92 watts with a maximum ampere draw of 0.84 AMP. Fan shall be rated for 180 CFM at .1" WG static pressure. Pressure switch shall be a Fantech, model DB10 pressure switch that starts the fan when positive pressure is sensed. Fan runs for 10 minutes when positive pressure is sensed in the duct then shuts off and turns on again as needed. Switch is rated for 115 volt supply and 2 ampere rating. Mount pressure switch in the exhaust duct behind the dryer in the dryer vent recessed box.
B.
C. 13.
CLOTHES DRYER VENT BOX: A. Recessed dryer vent box shall be a 21 inch recessed high molded box by The Dryerbox manufacturer. Model 425 shall be designed for a 2 X 6 wall. Box shall be UL listed classified for a 1 hour F rating, constructed of 22 gauge aluminized steel with a top port measuring 4 1/8". Overall measurements shall be 21" h X 12" w X 5 1/8" deep. Inside measurement shall be 9" w X 18" tall. Refer to installation instructions for correct installation in fire rated walls.
14.
THROWAWAY FILTERS: A. Throwaway filters not furnished with equipment shall be nominal 2" thick, pleated media, equivalent to American Air Filter AMAIR 300. In addition to the initial installation, furnish three (3) spare sets.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 7
B.
Filters shall feature woven media blended from synthetic and cotton fibers to provide a nominal 25% efficiency based on ASHRAE 52-76. Cam Farr 30/30, Airguard DPE 40, Purolator FMEX40, or Continental CPLT 32 are acceptable. Where indicated on the Drawings, filters shall be installed in a field fabricated frame with slide channels to hold the filters in place. Provide a hinged access door in the ductwork for filter removal.
C.
15.
REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS: A. Registers, grilles and diffusers, as scheduled on the Drawings, are those of the Price manufacturer. Equivalent units by Titus, Nailor Industries, Krueger, J & J, Reliable Metal, Carnes, Tuttle and Bailey, Anemostat, Hart and Cooley or ACP will be acceptable.
16.
SYSTEM BALANCING COORDINATION: A. The Mechanical Contractor shall make any changes required for correct balance as recommended by the Balancing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Such changes may encompass, but are not necessarily restricted to, pulleys, belts, ductwork, dampers or the addition of dampers and access doors. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall provide labor, equipment and cost of performing necessary corrections. All ductwork and coils shall be cleaned and left free of loose insulation and construction debris. The Mechanical Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems into full operation and shall continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Correct operation of equipment and system components and cleanliness of ductwork shall be the responsibility of the Sheet Metal Contractor. Filters shall be cleaned or replaced just prior to final balancing. All fans shall be initially started, lubricated and balanced to eliminate noise and vibration.
B. C.
D. E. 17.
AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS: A. B. Furnish and install air to air energy recovery units as specified here and scheduled on the drawings. Heat recovery units shall be equipped with inlet damper, filter boxes, fans and heat recovery core.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 8
C. D. E.
Energy recovery core shall be a fixed plate energy-exchange element with fixed plate cross flow construction with no moving parts. No condensate drain pans or drains shall be allowed and the unit shall be capable of operating in winter and summer conditions without generating condensate. Case shall be constructed of galvanized, 20 gauge steel, with lapped corners, and gasketed, zinc plated screw fasteners and shall be provided with double wall construction. Exhaust and fresh air fan motors shall be compatible with variable frequency drives. Flange components shall be provided suitable for connection of ductwork. Access doors shall provide easy access to blowers, energy transfer elements and filters. Panels shall be gasketed to provide air tight seal. Case walls and doors shall be insulated with 1" FSK high density board insulation, eliminating the possibility of exposing the fresh air to glass fibers. Energy exchange element shall be protected by 30% efficient 2" nominal pleated, disposable filters. Weather hoods shall be screened to exclude birds and animals. Inlet weather hood shall be sized to maintain inlet velocities below 500 fpm and equipped with rain excluder baffles. Blower motors shall be thermally protected with automatic reset or supplied with starters. Units shall be available from the factory with vertical return air and vertical supply air duct connection openings. Units shall contain two contactors and terminal strip allowing independent operation of the supply and exhaust blowers using external control devices. Belt drive units shall have adjustable sheaves to balance airflow rates. Non pitched factory roof curbs shall be shall be provided with the unit for use with the rooftop series units.
F. G. H. I. J. K.
L. M. N. O. P. 18.
FILTER BOXES A. Filter Boxes, as scheduled on the Plans, shall be Air Guard flat side access filter housings with 2" deep 30% efficient filters.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 9
B.
Housing shall be of 16 gauge galvanized steel with Z channel vertical support members at the corners. Filter track shall be extruded aluminum with polypropylene gasket. Access door shall be hinged and shall have neoprene gasketing on the perimeter and shall be equipped with positive pressure adjustable lathes with easy grip knobs. Options shall include double walled insulation on the entire housing and access doors. Equivalent filter boxes by EcoAir or BLC Industries are acceptable.
C. D. 19.
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS: A. Electric duct heaters shall be furnished as shown and as scheduled on the Drawings and specified herein. Heaters are Indeeco type QUA standard slip-in heaters as scheduled on the Drawings. Equivalent coils by Braasch, Gould and Thermolec acceptable. Heaters shall be approved by NEC and shall be UL listed for zero clearance to combustible surfaces. Heaters shall be of NEMA 1 construction, shall have hinged latching cover, automatic thermal protection cutout, terminal blocks for field wiring and door interlocked disconnect switch. Controls shall consist of silent mercury contactors, thermal cutouts, airflow switch, fuses, 24 VAC control circuit transformer and built-in, snap acting, door interlocked disconnect switch. Provide single or dual stage thermostats with built-in thermometer and adjustable heat anticipator, an adjustment range of 50F. to 90F., a differential of 1F., and an inductive rating of 1 amp at 30 volts maximum. Thermostat shall be mounted and wired by Electrical Contractor. Provide lockable cover with thermostat.
B.
C.
D.
20.
CURBS: A. Furnish prefabricated roof curbs by Greenheck Model GPR for Mechanical equipment with a total curb height of 18". Curbs on sloped roofs shall be tapered to provide level mounting surface. Curb shall be welded with wooden nailing strips held in place by metal wrap-around. The Mechanical Contractor shall install curbs and arrange for the Roofing Contractor to cut in the curbs and flash them into the existing roof system. Equivalent roof curbs Model ER-3A by Roof Products Systems acceptable.
B. C. D.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 10
B. 2.
INSTALLATION: A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that such work in complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Review manufacturers installation instructions for material and equipment to be installed and follow same. If there is conflict between the manufacturers installation instructions and the CORs drawings, consult the COR for determination of proper installation procedures. All fire and/or smoke dampers shall be operated prior to the final inspection to verify they function in accordance with NFPA 90A requirements. END OF SECTION 15800
B.
C.
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15800 11
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO SECTION 15950 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. B. C. D. E. F. Software Control Equipment Control Valves Automatic Dampers Damper Actuators Sequence of Operations
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION: A. Section 15650 - Hydronic Piping: Installation of control valves, flow switches, temperature sensor wells, gauge taps, flow meters.
B. Section 15650 - Humidifier Steam and Condensate Piping: Installation of control valves, flow switches, temperature sensor wells, gauge taps, flow meters. C. Section 15800 - Ductwork Accessories: Installation of automatic dampers.
D. Division 16 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Installation and connection of all power wiring. Power wiring shall be defined as follows: 1. 2. 3. Wiring of power feeds through all disconnect starters and variable speed controllers to electric motors. 120 VAC Emergency power feeds to all critical BAS and/or temperature control panels. Wiring of any remote start/stop switches and manual or automatic motor speed control devices not furnished by the BAS/ATC Contractor.
1.3 AGENCY LISTINGS: A. UL 916 Energy Management Systems
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
15950 1
B.
FCC-Part 15 Subparagraph J. Class A. Emissions requirements
1.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS: A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions and supplementary General Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.5 RELATED SECTIONS: A. B. C. Division 0 and Division 1 - General Conditions for the Project. Section 15010 - General Conditions for Mechanical Trades. Section 16010 - General Conditions for Electrical Trades.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. The automatic control system as specified herein shall be provided by a company specializing in performing the work of this section. Installation shall be under the full-time supervision of an authorized and experienced technician. A factory-trained representative shall adjust, test and calibrate all components and verify proper operation as specified herein and furnish to the COR a signed certificate indicating these things have been done. B. The automatic temperature control system for this building shall be an electronic, complete stand alone DDC system of software, hardware, operator input/output devices, control units, local area networks (LAN), sensors, control devices and actuators for control of the equipment specified in "Sequence of Operation". Temperature control system shall be web based to provide password protected access over the internet. 1.7 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: A. All electrical work performed in the installation of the BAS/ATC system as described in this specification shall be per Division 16 of these specifications, the National Electrical Code (NEC) and per applicable state and local codes. All wiring is to be in conduit. Where exposed, conduit shall be run parallel to building lines properly supported and sized at a maximum of 40% fill. In no cases shall field installed conduit smaller than 1/2" trade size be allowed. Where conductors are concealed (tenant spaces), cable rated for use in return air plenums shall be used. All control panels shall be NEMA rated and UL listed.
15950 2
1.8 SUBMITTALS: A. The following data/information shall be submitted for approval: 1. 2. 3. 4. Complete sequence of operation. Control system CAD generated drawings including all pertinent data to provide a functional operating system. Valve, humidifier and damper schedules showing size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment. Data sheets for all hardware and software control components.
1.9 PROJECT CLOSE OUT: A. Upon project completion the temperature control contractor shall provide oral operating and maintenance instruction to the owner's representative for a minimum of 8 hours during normal working hours. The contractor shall assist the owner in video taping the instruction if they choose to do so.
B. The temperature controls contractor shall provide written operating and maintenance instruction including a copy of each of the above-mentioned submittals, inspection and calibration frequency and cleaning methods with recommended cleaning materials. Provide 3 copies to the COR in 3-ring binders. 1.10 WARRANTY: A. All systems and components shall be guaranteed against defects in material, workmanship and installation for a period of one year after completion. The guarantee period shall start after final owner instruction and system certification of system operation. PART 2 PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. The Automatic Temperature Control System shall be: Johnson Controls by Johnson Controls, Inc. Honeywell by Honeywell Inc. Andover by a licensed Andover Controls Contractor. B. An 8 day prior approval is required for other bidders. Prior approval shall be contingent upon review of qualifications and proposed system design.
15950 3
2.2 GENERAL: A. The Building Automation System shall include but not be limited to the following components. 1. 2. The Operator Interface shall consist of hardware and software that allows user monitoring and adjustment of system parameters. System Application Controllers shall manage the Energy and Building Management capabilities of the automation system as well as facilitate remote communications and central monitoring. Application Specific Controllers shall provide distributed, pre-engineered control, specific to the mechanical equipment specified. Custom Application Controllers with distributed custom programming capability shall provide control for nonstandard control sequences. The Data Communications capability shall allow data to be shared between the various controllers in the architecture. The system software shall include system software for global application functions, application software for distributed controllers, and operator interface software. End devices such as sensors, actuators, dampers, valves, and relays.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7. B.
The failure of any single component shall not interrupt the control strategies of other operational devices. System expansion shall be through the addition of end devices, controllers, and other devices described in this specification.
2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE: A. A terminal type interface shall be provided to allow the building operator to view and acknowledge alarms, access/edit system database information, view system displays and reports, and customize the system as described in this specification. A Personal Computer may be supplied by the Building Automation System supplier if needed to provide this functionality. The Operator interface shall have a self-prompting menu and an English language display complete with a help function. The CRT shall be a 24-line, 80-character monochrome monitor with full alphanumeric keypad.
B. C.
15950 4
D.
Telephone Modem - An auto dial type telephone modem and associated cables shall be provided. The modem shall transmit at a minimum of 2400 BAUD and communicate over voice grade telephone lines. System architecture shall provide separate ports for modem and monochrome display. Manual switching from modem to monochrome display on a single port is not acceptable.
E.
2.4 SYSTEM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS: A. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand-alone, microprocessor based System Application Controllers to manage the global strategies described in Application software section. The System Application Controller shall have ample memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. The operating system of the System Application Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Data shall automatically be shared between System Application Controllers when they are networked together. The database and custom programming routines of remote System Application Controllers shall be editable from a single operator station. The system controller shall be equipped with a digital display for operator interface to view and change setpoints and schedules. The System Applications Controllers shall have the capability of being remotely monitored over telephone modem. Additional capabilities shall include automatically dialing out alarms, gathering alarms, reports and logs, programming and downloading databases.
B. C.
D. E. F. G.
2.5 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS: A. Application Specific Controllers shall be stand-alone, microprocessor based Direct Digital Controllers with sufficient memory to handle its operating system, database and programming requirements. The controller shall communicate with other devices on the communication network and be fully integrated with the other system components. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
B. C.
15950 5
2.6 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS: A. The Custom Application Controllers shall provide stand-alone control and require no additional system components for complete operation. It shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. All programming required for operation shall be memory resident and shall be retained in permanent memory. Battery backup for a minimum of 72 hours is also permissible. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
B.
C.
2.7 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES: A. DAMPERS 1. The building Automation System supplier shall provide all automatic control dampers not specified to be supplied integral to the HVAC equipment. 2. Dampers shall be low leakage type. All proportional dampers shall be opposed blade type. Two position dampers may be opposed or paralleled blade type. 3. Damper frames and blades shall be galvanized steel and a minimum of 16 gauge. Blade width shall not exceed 8 inches. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of -50 to 250 degrees F. 4. Standard Low Leakage Dampers Standard low leakage dampers shall be provided to conserve energy. Dampers shall be equipped with neoprene edge seals and compressible metal jamb seals. Leakage shall not exceed 10 CFM/Sq.Ft. at 4" W.G. differential. Standard Low Leakage dampers shall be Ruskin, Model CD36 or equal. B. DAMPERS OPERATORS 1. Damper operators shall be electronic, spring return, low voltage (24 VAC) and shall be properly sized so as to stroke the damper smoothly and efficiently throughout its range. Actuator response shall be linear in response to sensed load.
15950 6
C.
CONTROL VALVES Valve body patterns shall be 2-way, or 3-way mixing as specified. Valves 2" and smaller shall be characterized controlled flow ball or globe valves; bronze body, screwed type and shall be rated at 250 psig. Valve bodies 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron, flanged and rated at 125 psig except where otherwise noted. Valves shall be selected for not more than 5 psig pressure drop for modulating service and at 1 psig pressure drop for on/off applications. Globe valves shall have stainless steel stems and allow for servicing including packing, stem, and disk replacement. Characterized control ball valves shall also have stainless steel stem and balls with TEFZEL flow-characterizing disc in the inlet of 2-way valves and in the control port of 3-way valves.
D.
VALVE ACTUATORS 1. Valve actuators shall be electronic, spring return, low voltage (24 VAC), and properly selected for the valve body and service. 2. Primary equipment valve actuators shall be fully proportioning and be spring return for normally open or normally closed operation for freeze, fire or temperature protection or as called out in the sequence of operations. 3. Reheat coil, radiation and terminal unit valve control shall be floating, nonspring return actuators. Proportional control is acceptable. Reinitialize the position of floating or tri-state actuators once per week for accurate positioning.
E.
BUTTERFLY VALVES Butterfly valves used for automatic control shall be lug type rated for 125 psi nonshock water service to 180 deg. F. 1. Valve body shall be ductile iron with B-Nitrite (BUNA N) or EPDM molded seat and seals. 2. Disc material shall be cast bronze of aluminum-bronze with ASTM A-492 Type 416SS stainless steel stem and fittings. 3. Valves shall be tight close off suitable for end of the line service. 4. Butterfly valves used for two position control shall be line size.
15950 7
5. Valves used for modulating control applications (4 inch and larger service only) shall be sized for a 3 psig maximum differential pressure at full flow. 6. Three way valve mixing or diverting configurations shall have factory provided linkage kits specifically manufactured for the piping arrangement and actuator used. F. TEMPERATURE SENSORS 1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) or Thermistor as dictated by the requirements of this specification. 2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as specified in the sequence of operations. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of 5 feet in length. 3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. 4. Space sensors shall be equipped with +/-5% setpoint adjustment and/or override switch as specified on the plans or in the sequence of operations. a. All space sensors/thermostats shall be mounted such that any manual operators (buttons, slides, etc.) are no higher than 54" AFF. Except where a side wheelchair approach is not attainable, they shall be mounted at 48" AFF. b. At all thermostats. A loop of not less than 18" of wire shall be left in the wall behind the thermostat to facilitate lowering them in the future. 5. Accuracies shall be +/- 1 degree F for standard applications. G. HUMIDITY SENSORS 1. Humidity sensors shall be capacitance or bulk polymer resistance type. 2. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20 to 80% with accuracy of +/- 5% R.H. Duct sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber. 3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20 to 95% R.H. It shall be suitable for ambient conditions of -40 to 170 degrees F. H. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES 1. Differential Pressure Switches shall be furnished as indicated for status purposes in air and water applications. Provide single pole double throw switch with fully adjustable differential pressure settings.
15950 8
I.
STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS 1. Static pressure sensors shall be differential pressure type. The sensor range shall be closely matched to the system static pressure, -.5 to .5 inches, -1 to 1 inches, 0 to 2.5 inches. 2. Sensor accuracy shall be plus or minus 5% of the sensing range.
J.
HIGH LIMIT THERMOSTATS 1. High limit thermostats shall be manual reset type set at 120 degrees F.
K.
LOW LIMIT THERMOSTATS 1. Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with a 20 foot minimum element. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any one foot section. 2. Low limit shall be manual reset only.
2.9 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE: This specification covers complete adjustable frequency motor drive consisting of a pulsewidth-modulated inverter, for positive speed control of standard NEMA Design B induction motors. The adjustable frequency system shall be variable torque for HVAC pumps, fans, etc., as manufactured by Asea Brown Boveri, in New Berlin, WI. A. The adjustable frequency inverter shall be provided in a NEMA 1 enclosure for installation as a wall-mounted or floor-mounted unit complete with all options factory assembled. Inverter logic shall be microprocessor based, and the control logic shall be isolated from the power circuitry. The inverter shall incorporate a switching power supply operating off the DC link of the control, eliminating control transformers and line disturbance sensitivity. The control shall employ a diode bridge rectifier input, providing a constant displacement power factor of .95 at all operating speeds and loads. Input voltages shall be 460 VAC, +10%, -10%, 3-phase 60 Hz power. Output voltages of 0 to 460 VAC 3-phase 2 to 60 Hz. The control shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures of 0 to 40C (32 to 104F).
15950 9
B. C. D. E. F. G.
H.
A built-in digital display shall be provided to indicate status as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Output frequency Motor speed (RPM) Motor current Output voltage Runtime counter KWH counter Fault text in English language
It shall also provide an indication of the activation of the control's protection features, and/or status as follows: I. The control shall include the following features and adjustments: Instantaneous overcurrent protection at 150% of the control's rated current. Adjustable current limit (60 - 110% of the control's rated current) Adjustable volts per hertz (V/Hz) + 10%, -10% Adjustable acceleration rate of .5 -30, or 30 - 300 seconds Adjustable deceleration rate of 1-30, or 30 - 300 seconds Adjustable maximum speed of 100-0% Adjustable minimum speed of 0 - 100% Adjustable input speed command gain 1:1 to 10:1 Adjustable input speed command offset of 0 - 50% Adjustable motor output voltage boost Adjustable electronic motor overload protection with a range of 60 100% of the control's rated current 12. Adjustable analog output voltage of 0-1 to 0-10 volts DC, proportional to the control's output frequency voltage, or current 13. Input speed command invert switch 14. Digital frequency output of 12 volts DC, operating at six times the control's output frequency 15. Automatic restart after a fault, limited to 5 attempts, after which a manual restart is required 16. Three sets of single-pole double throw contacts for remote indication of enable, current limit, and fault conditions rated .5 amps @ 230 VAC, 1 AMP @ 115 VAC 17. RS-485 communication port 18. The control shall be capable of operation without a motor connected 19. The control will operate (ride through) with power outages of up to 16.66 milliseconds 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
15950 10
J.
Indicating Lights: 1. Power on - lights anytime input power is applied to the control 2. Fault Light - Lights whenever the control's protective circuit activities.
K.
Optional Features To Be Included: 1. Hand-off-automatic control with manual speed control.
L.
Furnish fusible, lockable, heavy-duty disconnect switch either integral to drive or loose for mounting and wiring by Electrical Contractor. Loose disconnects shall be Cutler-Hammer, Square D, or Siemens.
M. The VFD supplier shall provide startup assistance by factory-trained personnel to assure proper VFD operation with the control and mechanical systems. A written start up report shall be submitted to the Owner and Engineer. N. The VFD supplier shall provide an on-site factory training program for the Owner's staff. This program shall provide operating or instruction manuals, training in equipment, operation, and trouble shooting of the VFD. The Variable Frequency Drive Supplier shall provide a 30 day full parts and labor on-site warranty and a two year parts warranty, not to exceed 30 months from shipment. The VFD supplier shall be capable of providing on site repair of Variable Frequency Drives in their installed location.
O.
P.
Q. Equivalent units by Magnetek, Toshiba, Fuji, Danfoss-Graham, Allen-Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, Siemens and Square D will be acceptable. R. Variable frequency drives shall be provided on the following items of equipment: Item P-5 P-6 Horsepower 7 1/2 7 1/2 Voltage/Phase 460-3-60 460-3-60
2.10 SYSTEM APPLICATION CONTROLLER SOFTWARE: A. SYSTEM SECURITY 1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords for a minimum of eight users. 2. Passwords shall have at least three levels of user access with data entry restrictions being assignable by password.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 15950 11
3. User log-on/log-off attempts shall be recorded. 4. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable. B. ALARMS 1. The Building Automation System shall provide audio, visual, contact closure, and remote telephone annunciation for: a. b. c. d. e. f. Remote equipment failure Equipment run time Number of start/stops Program failure Card failure Sensor failure
2. Each analog sensor and binary point shall be individually alarmed for values in excess of individual high/low or status. 3. When an alarm state is detected, the alarm shall automatically be stored and the user notified by printing the alarm message, sounding an audible tone, and flashing an alarm message on the CRT. C. DIAL-UP COMMUNICATIONS An auto dial-up and auto-answer communications utility shall allow stand alone System Application Controllers to communicate with remote operator stations over voice grade phone lines. 1. REMOTE ALARMING/REPORTING Controllers shall automatically call operator stations to report alarms, and upload historical data and reports. a. In the event that the controller is unable to connect with the remote station, it shall continue to a temp to communication on a predetermined interval until communication is successful. The capability shall exist to automatically switch to a backup phone number in the event communications is unsuccessful with the first number.
15950 12
2. REMOTE OPERATOR COMMUNICATIONS a. Operators shall be able to dial-up remote System Application Controllers and gain access to the full control, reporting, and system modification capabilities described in this specification. b. The operator shall dial-up remote building by selecting the userdefinable name associated with the building. Manual dialing is not acceptable. 2.11 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE: The following Energy Management capabilities shall be furnished standard as part of the Building Automation System. A. SCHEDULING 1. The scheduling program shall have a minimum of 32 named master schedules. Each master schedule shall have a minimum of eight day schedules (seven plus holiday). 2. To these master schedules, a minimum of 24 system loads (HVAC equipment, etc) or groups of loads can be assigned. 3. The master schedule shall be individually editable for each day of the week and holiday. 4. On any day, a minimum of six time of day events may be edited including: a. b. c. d. e. B. equipment start/stop optimum start/stop occupied/unoccupied duty cycle start/stop night purge cycle start
OPTIMUM START/STOP 1. An optimum start/stop program shall determine the required equipment start/stop timing by applying inside/outside temperature information to the user's time of day schedule. 2. The optimum start/stop program shall run independently for each controlled load or zone.
15950 13
2.12 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE: The following Building Management capabilities shall be furnished as part of the Building Automation System. A. TIMED OVERRIDE 1. A timed override program shall be provided to enable the building operator to set up devices or groups of devices to be temporarily turned on for a defined period of time based on binary inputs, analog inputs, or CRT inputs. 2. The override time shall be adjustable from 1 to 720 minutes. 3. A standard weekly and monthly report shall be provided for easy documentation of timed override operation. B. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL 1. The Direct Digital Control program shall allow modulating control of remote devices based on sensed data. 2. Standard control strategies shall include proportional and proportional plus integral. 3. Control routines shall be flexible enough to allow operator to set parameters and make adjustments. C. CUSTOM PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE 1. A custom control language capability shall be provided to allow the operator to create real time, equation based, custom control routines. 2. All binary and analog points in the building Automation System shall be available as inputs to the custom routines. 3. Equation operations shall include math functions such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, square root, minimum, maximum, and average. Logical functions such as greater than, less than, equal to, not equal to, less than or equal to, greater than or equal to, variable timing and delays shall also be allowed. D. RUN TIME MAINTENANCE 1. The system shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based upon user designated run time, starts and/or calendar date limits.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 15950 14
2. A minimum of 32 separate devices shall be monitored under this function. E. EXPANDED MESSAGES The user shall be able to define a minimum of ten 40 character messages for automatic printing in the event of system alarm and/or run time and maintenance events. F. REPORTS AND LOGS The system shall include the capability to store, review and print the following reports and logs. In addition, if a PC interface is specified, these reports shall be saved to diskette as an ASCII file for use by other owner furnished software packages. 1. Weekly Temperature Report - A previous 7 day summary of the minimum and maximum temperatures for the critical zone temperature sensors. 2. Weekly Override Time Report - A previous 7 day summary of after hours override usage (in hours and minutes) for the timed override groups. 3. Monthly Override Time Report - A current and previous month summary of after hours override usage (in hours and minutes) for the timed override groups). 4. Trend Logs - A custom report generator allowing the user to trend and store at least 24 simple points based on a user-defined schedule. 5. Event Logs - The system shall track system events including alarms, logons and diagnostics. 6. Input/Output Status Reports - This reporting tool shall allow the operator to review the status of all system points. 7. Custom Report Capability - The building operator shall be provided with a simple method of creating custom reports. a. Monthly Custom Reports shall be able to provide current, minimum, maximum, average and peak values for analog points; and number of starts and run times for binary item in the monthly custom reports shall display three values for the selected point: current status, daily accumulated value, monthly accumulated value. b. A Twelve-Month Custom Report shall be able to display binary or analog items selected from the Monthly Reports.
15950 15
8. HVAC Equipment Status Displays - Standard, preformatted status displays shall be provided to indicate the HVAC equipment status, as well as the status of all input/output points of connected HVAC equipment. G. ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER PROTECTION 1. A software program shall be provided to allow each individual piece of HVAC equipment to be individually programmable with "minimum on", and "minimum off" timers to protect HVAC equipment from rapid cycling due to system or operator error. 2. Minimum on/off timer program shall have priority over all application software functions except fire shutdown and smoke evacuation modes. 3. For system start-up purposes, timers shall be set at 15 minutes or at an acceptable time as documented by the HVAC equipment supplier. 4. Timers shall be individually programmable from 0 to 120 minutes. H. CUSTOM PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS 1. A user-friendly custom DDC programming utility shall be provided to allow the building operator to tailor the system to meet individual needs and respond to changing building requirements. 2. The building operator shall be able to create custom DDC routes using analog and binary point values, alarm states, constants, and shared variables to perform calculations. The results of these calculations shall be used to perform analog control, binary control, DDC loop enable/disable, and other control functions. 3. The building operator shall be able to download these routines to the System or Custom Application controllers either via modem, direct connect, or through a Portable Operator Interface. 4. Custom routines in distributed controllers shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory to prevent loss in a power outage. Custom routines hosted in hosted in Systems Applications controllers may use battery backup so long as a quick method of system downloading is provided.
15950 16
PART 3
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR CORE PUMPS P-5 AND P-6: A. Pumps P-5 and P-6 shall be located in existing school, mechanical room #222. Pumps P-5 and P-6 shall be the core circulation pumps for the heat pump system in the Dormitory. Either pump P-5 or P-6 shall provide conditioned heat pump water to the heat pumps whenever there is one or more heat pumps operating. Building Automation System (BAS) shall control which pump is in operation. Pump P-5 variable frequency drive shall modulate pump P-5 speed to maintain differential pressure in the piping system where shown on the drawings. Pump P-6 variable frequency drive shall modulate pump P-6 to maintain differential pressure in the piping system where shown on the drawings. Temperature control system shall rotate pump operation every 336 hours of run time. If one pump shall fail, an alarm shall be initiated at the BAS and the other (standby) pump shall start. If all Dormitory heat pumps are off, core pump P-5 or P-6 shall shutdown. If the heat pump loop pressure upstream of the pumps drops below 2 PSI, pumps P-5 and P-6 shall shut down and an alarm shall be initiated at the BAS.
3.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR DORMITORY HEAT PUMPS: A. ATC shall furnish and field mount heat pump controllers on the air to water heat pumps. ATC shall furnish and install wall-mounted sensors with occupied/unoccupied override capability where shown. ATC shall provide quick opening, slow closing two position, two way solenoid valves for all air to water heat pumps, except for the last three heat pumps on the heat pump supply piping. These three heat pumps will have continuous flow through them. Heat pump controller shall open the solenoid valve prior to the energizing of the respective heat pumps compressor. Temperature sensor through the heat pump controller shall control the solenoid valve, heat pump fan, reversing valve and compressor operation. Controller shall monitor space temperature, discharge air temperature, fan status and lockout relay (fault). Day setback in the dormitory areas shall be initially set at 5F below night setting in the winter and 10F above setting in the summer. The central areas and isolation rooms shall be on occupied mode continuously. Provide the capability to schedule occupied/unoccupied hours of operation for each individual heat pump in the central area and isolation rooms to meet the owners varied schedule. Heat pump compressor operation shall be stopped if ATC system detects low or high loop temperatures or no flow condition. ATC shall provide filter status at each heat pump. Alarm shall be initiated at the BASs central controller when pressure drop setpoint is exceeded.
B.
15950 17
3.3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR DOMESTIC WATER CIRCULATION PUMP P-3.1 (DORMITORY): A. Domestic hot water circulation pumps P-3.1 shall circulate domestic hot water during the occupied period. During the occupied period, P-3.1 shall be energized. During the unoccupied period, P-3.1 shall be off. If pump shall fail, alarm shall be initiated at the BAS.
B.
3.4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT ERP-3.1 (DORMITORY): A. Unit is a ventilation system consisting of a heat recovery unit with a supply fan and an exhaust fan, a duct mounted electric heating coil, a humidifier with a duct mounted dispersion tube and two air flow monitoring stations. During the occupied period, the fresh air damper shall be 100% open and the supply fan and the exhaust fan shall operate continuously at full speed. During periods of low occupant loads when students are at class, the fresh air damper shall be 100% open and the supply fan and the exhaust fan shall operate continuously at minimum speed. During low occupant periods, CO sensors located in the central area and the isolation room shall increase ventilation rates to maintain carbon dioxide levels below 800ppm. The CO sensor that reads the highest concentration shall control the ventilation system. Humidity sensors in the shower rooms shall increase ventilation rates to maintain humidity levels below 60%. The shower room humidity sensor that reads the highest relative humidity shall control the ventilation system. Duct sensor downstream of the electric heating coil shall modulate the heating coil to maintain 65 degree discharge air temperature. Electric heating coil shall be off if air flow is not satisfied. Duct mounted hi limit temperature control with manual reset located downstream of the electric heating coil shall shutdown the electric heating coil if a temperature of 120 degrees or greater is sensed. Humidifier shall be energized if the outdoor air temperature is less than 65 degrees, air flow is proven in the fresh air duct and the buildings relative humidity is below setpoint. Space humidity sensor shall modulate the humidifier to maintain 30% relative humidity in the space. Duct mounted humidity sensor downstream of the heating coil shall limit humidifier output to 60% relative humidity in the duct when building relative humidity is below setpoint. A duct mounted hi limit humidity sensor located downstream of the heating coil shall shut down the humidifier if the relative humidity in the duct is over 80%. Humidifier shall be locked out if there is no airflow in the duct.
B.
C.
D.
E.
15950 18
F. G.
Furnish and install an airflow device in the fresh air and return air ducts to measure and record airflows at the BASs central controller. ATC shall provide filter status at exhaust air filter box and fresh air filter box. Alarm shall be initiated at the BASs central controller when pressure drop setpoint is exceeded at either filter box.
3.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT ERP-3.2 (DORMITORY): A. Unit is a ventilation system consisting of a heat recovery unit with a supply fan and an exhaust fan, a duct mounted electric heating coil, a humidifier with a duct mounted dispersion tube and two air flow monitoring stations. During the occupied period, the fresh air damper shall be 100% open and the supply fan and the exhaust fan shall operate continuously at full speed. During periods of low occupant loads when students are at class, the fresh air damper shall be 100% open and the supply fan and the exhaust fan shall operate continuously at minimum speed. During low occupant periods, CO sensors located in the central area and the isolation room shall increase ventilation rates to maintain carbon dioxide levels below 800ppm. The CO sensor that reads the highest concentration shall control the ventilation system. Humidity sensors in the shower rooms shall increase ventilation rates to maintain humidity levels below 60%. The shower room humidity sensor that reads the highest relative humidity shall control the ventilation system. Duct sensor downstream of the electric heating coil shall modulate the heating coil to maintain 65 degree discharge air temperature. Electric heating coil shall be off if air flow is not satisfied. Duct mounted hi limit temperature control with manual reset located downstream of the electric heating coil shall shutdown the electric heating coil if a temperature of 120 degrees or greater is sensed. Humidifier shall be energized if the outdoor air temperature is less than 65 degrees, air flow is proven in the fresh air duct and the buildings relative humidity is below setpoint. Space humidity sensor shall modulate the humidifier to maintain 30% relative humidity in the space. Duct mounted humidity sensor downstream of the heating coil shall limit humidifier output to 60% relative humidity in the duct when building relative humidity is below setpoint. A duct mounted hi limit humidity sensor located downstream of the heating coil shall shut down the humidifier if the relative humidity in the duct is over 80%. Humidifier shall be locked out if there is no airflow in the duct. Furnish and install an airflow device in the fresh air and return air ducts to measure
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
15950 19
PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO and record airflows at the BASs central controller. G. ATC shall provide filter status at exhaust air filter box and fresh air filter box. Alarm shall be initiated at the BASs central controller when pressure drop setpoint is exceeded at either filter box.
3.6 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR BROWNOUT PROTECTION (DORMITORY): A. B. Phase Fault monitor furnished and installed by ATC will monitor phase loss and low voltage condition on HVAC electric service. If a low voltage condition or phase loss is detected, all mechanical equipment shall be shut down. As soon as power returns to normal for a minimum of 5 minutes, the HVAC systems shall be sequenced on.
3.7 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR COVE HEATERS IN RESTROOMS (CP-*): A. Vandal proof temperature sensor located in the space and the BAS system shall energize cove heaters to maintain space setpoint. Provide relays as necessary to control multiple cove heaters with one temperature sensor.
3.8 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR FAN FORCED ELECTRIC HEATERS (FF-*): A. Vandal proof temperature sensor located in the space and the BAS system shall energize fan forced electric heaters to maintain space setpoint.
3.9 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS (EH-*): A. Vandal proof temperature sensor/thermostat (smart sensor) located in the space and the BAS system shall energize cove heaters to maintain space setpoint. Provide setpoint adjustment capability in the space as well as at the BAS.
3.10 GRAPHICS: A. ATC shall provide a complete graphics layout for the above temperature control systems. Graphic floor plans shall indicate heat pump, fan forced heaters, cover heaters, electric unit heaters, makeup air units, pumps, thermostat, humidistat, equipment locations, room numbers, controlled equipment in the mechanical rooms, setpoints and relevant operating points (temperatures, alarms, status, etc.).
15950 20
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL PUEBLO PINTADO K-8 SCHOOL DORMITORY II PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 CUBA, NEW MEXICO COMMISSION #08023 Section 16010 Section 16011 Section 16040 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16130 Section 16133 Section 16140 Section 16155 Section 16160 Section 16170 Section 16181 Section 16410 Section 16421 Section 16450 Section 16460 Section 16510 Section 16601 Section 16721 Section 16730 Section 16740 Section 16741 Section 16742 Section 16743 Section 16760 Section 16780 Section 16850 Section 16910 GENERAL PROVISIONS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION RACEWAYS CONDUCTORS OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES CABINETS WIRING DEVICES AND DEVICE PLATES MOTOR STARTERS PANELBOARDS DISCONNECT SWITCHES FUSES ELECTRIC SERVICE SECONDARY SURGE ARRESTORS GROUNDING TRANSFORMERS LUMINAIRES LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION CLOCK AND PROGRAM SYSTEM TELEPHONE SERVICE VOICE/DATA ROUGH-IN VOICE AND DATA CABLING FIBER OPTIC CABLING INTERCOMMUNICATION AND PROGRAM SYSTEM TV SIGNAL CABLING ELECTRIC HEATING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Specification Format 1.
Section 16010 Page 1 General Provisions
2.
3.
These Specifications are written in imperative and abbreviated form. This imperative language of the technical sections is directed at the Contractors, unless specifically noted otherwise. Incomplete sentences shall be completed by inserting "shall", "the Contractor shall", and "shall be", and similar mandatory phrases by inference in the same manner as they are applied to notes on the Drawings. The words "shall be" shall be supplied by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases. Except as worded to the contrary, perform all indicated requirements whether stated imperatively or otherwise. Three Part Format a. "Part 1.00 - General": Covers those areas which relate to the Work, and which define the general administrative and technical requirements specific to a particular section. b. "Part 2.00 - Products": Defines, in detail, the acceptance equipment and materials to be incorporated into the Work. c. "Part 3.00 - Execution": Describes, in detail, the manner in which items covered by Part 2 are to be incorporated into the Work. Where Codes, Specifications and Drawings are in conflict, the Contractor will be deemed to have bid the more expensive method. Refer all such discrepancies immediately to the Engineer prior to commencing related work.
B.
Definitions 1. 2. 3. "Furnish" - Supply equipment as required by these Drawings and Specifications, delivered to the job site for installation or use by others. "Install" - Fix in position for total operational use all apparatus as shown, specified or required. Provide all miscellaneous fittings and wiring supplies. "Or Equal" - Equipment or material selected by Engineer. Use only equipment or materials identified by manufacturer's name and catalog or model number in Specifications or Drawings. No warranty is made regarding specified product availability "Or Equivalent" - Materials selected by Contractor subject to Engineer's acceptance. "Provide" - Furnish and install in place, total and operational.
4. 5. C.
Work Included 1. 2. Provide labor, equipment and materials in connection with Work specified and shown on Drawings. Work of this Division is subject to requirements of Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Division One, and all other sections of this Specification. Examine site and all Contract documents prior to submittal of bid. 16010-1
3.
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico D. Work Installed But Furnished Under Other Directives 1.
2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
Provide service for electrically operated equipment not specified in Division 16. Verify size and locations of such connections by securing all rough-in requirements from the equipment supplier. Equipment requiring electrical service shall be furnished with motors, special controls and remote electrical devices as specified in other Divisions. Verify extent of controls and devices furnished by referring to Divisions where Work is specified. Provide disconnects, starters, control devices, thermal units, fuses, switches and all necessary power and control wiring. Include the installation of remote electrical devices furnished separately with the equipment. Provide identification for remote devices as directed by the Engineer. Contractors of other Divisions providing electrically operated equipment shall verify with the Electrical Contractor the proper voltage and phase before releasing equipment for shipment. Unless otherwise specified, Contractor responsible for furnishing such equipment is also responsible for setting in place.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Substitution and Prior Approval to Quote. 1. 2. The reference to manufacturer's name and catalog or model numbers shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality, not as limiting competition. Suppliers wishing to price material or equipment not referenced in Specifications or on Drawings shall apply in writing to Engineer for approval to quote. Fax or e-mail submittals not acceptable unless specifically requested by the Engineer. Include complete descriptive technical data on the proposed item consisting of: model numbers, type, size and performance characteristics. Procedure also applies to requests by Contractor. Self-addressed, stamped envelope required for return reply. The request for prior approval to quote shall be received in Engineer's office no later than 192 hours (eight days) prior to bid opening. All substitute items approved for quotation will be listed in Addenda sent to all planholders in advance of bid opening. Contractors choosing to use material or equipment other than those shown on Drawings or specified in detail, but approved for quotation, shall be responsible for physical dimensions and coordination. Architect, Engineer, or Owner will not be responsible for costs of necessary changes and additional work required by Contractor or any other trades. Substitutions will not be permitted after bid opening.
3.
4.
5.
16010-2
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico
B.
Correspondence 1. Direct all correspondence concerning Division 16 submittals to: PRAIRIE ENGINEERING, P.C. 619 RIVERWOOD DRIVE, SUITE 205 BISMARCK ND 58504-4304
C.
Shop Drawings 1. 2. 3. Before any of the materials are delivered to the job, submit to Engineer via the Prime Contractor complete Shop Drawings for each item indicated. (Minimum six copies). Include catalog numbers, performance data, dimensions and other descriptive information. Shop Drawings may be in the form of printed catalog sheets showing all necessary information and shall be completely indexed and tabbed, and be bound in Duo-Tang, Mead or equivalent folders. Each Shop Drawing folder shall be stamped, initialed, and dated, by Prime Contractor to indicate he has thoroughly reviewed them in accordance with General Conditions. Shop Drawings not in conformance with Specification will be returned to Prime Contractor without review. Two copies will be retained by Engineer after review and balance will be returned to Prime Contractor.
4. 5. 6.
D. Record Drawings 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Designate one set of clean blueprints at project site as Record Drawings. Make Record Drawings available to Engineer during project visitation. As work progresses, Contractor's field supervisor shall mark Record Drawings in red pencil to indicate actual conditions of installation. Show same general details as Drawings. Give particular attention to marking actual locations of feeders and underground runs. Affix all addendum and change order descriptions to appropriate record drawing sheet, utilizing spray adhesive. Submit Record Drawings to Engineer along with Record Manuals at close of project. Upon Engineer's review, provide additional three photocopies of Record Drawings. Blueprint photocopies may be obtained at Bismarck-Mandan Construction Plan Exchange, Frontier Precision, Inc., and Mathison's.
E.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Upon completion of Work of this Division and as condition of its acceptance, Contractor shall compile three Record Manuals in loose-leaf hardcover binders. List project name, date, Contractor's name, address and telephone number on exterior label of each Record Manual.
16010-3
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 3. 4.
5.
6. 7. 1.03
Include an index sheet indicating each major piece of equipment, supplier and supplier's telephone number. Provide tabbed dividers indicating major groupings of equipment. Record Manual information shall be included for all equipment/material where Shop Drawings are required. Also include all installation, operation and maintenance data packaged with any equipment. Turn over to Owner all spare equipment and devices specified and shown. List quantities on contractor letterhead or invoice, obtain signature of Owner's representative acknowledging receipt, and include with each Record Manual. Include one copy of each instructional videotape, properly identified as to specification section, with record tabs broken out. Format to be VHS or DVD. Include copy of State Electrical Board Wiring Certificate in each Record Manual.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers 1. 2. 3. For installation and testing, use only trained licensed and experienced workmen familiar with items required and manufacturer's recommended methods. In acceptance or rejection of installed work, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the workmen. To the maximum extent possible, retain the same supervisory personnel throughout the duration of the Work.
B.
Licenses, Permits, Codes and Standards 1. Materials, workmanship and installation: comply with the latest editions of all applicable codes, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations, insurance carrier requirements and these Specifications. Codes and standards shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: a. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). b. National Electrical Code (NEC) c. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) d. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) e. State and local wiring standards f. Building and fire codes g. ADAABAAG (Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines 36 CFR, Part 1191), including using ADAABAAG Child Anthropometrics, as clarifies in Bureau of Indian Affairs Office of Facilities Management and Construction, School Facilities Design Handbook/Space Templates, issued June 25, 2007. The more stringent provisions shall govern where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with these Specifications or Drawings. Where Codes, Specifications or Drawings differ with one another, the Contractor will be deemed to have bid the more expensive method. Refer all such discrepancies to the Engineer immediately.
2.
3.
16010-4
Pertinent codes and standards shall not be cited to furnish less than specifically shown or specified. Obtain and pay all permits, inspections, licenses and other charges pertaining to the Work. Upon completion of the Work, furnish proof of acceptance by proper agency having jurisdiction.
1.04
GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A. Contractor shall guarantee materials, workmanship and the proper operation of equipment for a period of one year after Owner's beneficial use of the building or electrical system. Contractor shall correct all equipment, material and workmanship found to be defective or non-conforming to the contract documents without cost to Owner. Guarantee shall include trips to the project site by Contractor to adjust electrical equipment as required, ensuring it is operating as intended. Specified guarantee shall not relieve Contractor from liability arising from improper installation or non-compliance with applicable codes.
B.
C.
1.05
CHANGES TO CONTRACT A. Any required changes to the contract after bid date shall be in accordance with General Conditions. Such proposed changes shall be accompanied with complete substantiating documentation, including take off and pricing sheets, and letters of quotation. Restocking charges shall not apply to any credited material.
1.06
TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Refer to Special Conditions for details of temporary facilities.
1.07
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. B. C. Refer to Division 1 "Applications for Payment". Provide one additional copy, sent directly to the Engineer. Format and content: 1. When included with the Bid, the following categories shall be indicated on the application for payment: a. Project mobilization. b. Demolition. c. Service & Distribution (all switchgear, panels, transformers, motor control centers, and loose control/disconnects, installed in place). d. Lighting (all fixtures and lamps, installed in place, including pre-fabricated wiring system).
16010-5
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico e. f. g. h. i.
j. k.
Wiring Devices (all switches, receptacles, and plates, except voice-data, installed in place). Equipment Connections (HVAC, elevator, food service, etc, connected in place). Basic Materials (all conduit, wire, boxes, supports, fittings, grounding materials, except special systems and voice-data cabling systems, installed in place). Fire Alarm & Detection (all system equipment, installed in place). Special Systems (all system equipment and cabling, installed in place, broken out by Specification Section. Examples include Clock and Program, Intercom, Nurse Call, Public Address, Sound Reinforcement, Rescue Assistance, TV Signal Cabling, Architectural and Theatrical Lighting Controls, and the like). Emergency Generator (all system equipment, installed in place). Voice-Data Cabling Systems (all system equipment, installed in place).
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Material and equipment shall be as shown or specified. Provide material not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the Work, subject to the acceptance of the Engineer. All material and equipment shall be new when delivered to the job and be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).. Owner will not be liable for material installed in non-compliance with codes, standards, and these Contract Documents.
B.
C.
2.02
PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection 1. Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Division before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
B.
Replacements 1. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Engineer, Architect, or Owner shall not be responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by Contractor.
16010-6
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico B.
Engineer, Architect, or Owner shall not be responsible for safety precautions and programs incidental to work of Contractor. It is the sole responsibility of Contractor to initiate, maintain, and supervise all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
C.
3.02
SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Prior to work of each Section of Division 16, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Verify that work of this Division may be installed in accordance with all pertinent codes, regulations and standards.
B.
3.03
COORDINATION A. B. Order material in a timely fashion to ensure it is on job site when required. Coordinate installation of material with schedule of other trades to prevent unnecessary delay in construction schedule.
3.04
DISCREPANCIES, CONSTRUCTION CONFLICTS AND DRAWINGS A. Discrepancies 1. 2. 3. B. Prior to submitting bid, Contractor shall refer any apparent discrepancies or omissions to Engineer for clarification. The Architect, Engineer or Owner will not be responsible for any oral instructions or modifications to the contract documents prior to opening of bids. Written interpretation or clarification will be made by Addenda.
Construction Conflicts 1. 2. 3. Conflicts discovered during construction shall be immediately called to the attention of the Engineer for decision. Do not proceed with installation in area of question until conflict has been fully resolved. When so directed by Engineer, Contractor shall make minor adjustment to avoid interferences with other trades. Such minor adjustments shall be performed at no additional cost to the Architect, Engineer or Owner.
C.
Drawings 1. Drawings indicate extent and general layout of electrical systems for project. Due to small scale, it is not possible to indicate all fittings and accessories that may be required.
16010-7
2. 3.
4. 5.
Provide such fittings and accessories as required to form a complete and operating system in general conformance with Specifications and Drawings. Data indicated on Drawings and in these Specifications is as exact as could be secured, but absolute accuracy is not guaranteed. Exact locations, distances, levels and other conditions will be governed by the structure. Field measurements shall take precedence over the Drawings. Use the Drawings and these Specifications for guidance. Secure the Architect's approval for all changes in locations. Verify all measurements at site. No compensation will be made because of difference between locations shown on the Drawings and measurements at the building. Refer to the architectural drawings for dimensions and locations of walls, partitions, doors, windows, ceiling heights, door swings and other details of construction.
3.05
UNDERGROUND UTILITIES A. Locations of existing underground utilities are based on available site information and are shown approximately. Contractor shall determine exact utility locations before commencing work and shall be responsible for repair of damages resulting from his construction activities. Trench and backfill for installation of underground conduits to depth shown or required. Remove any accumulated water in excavation by pumping. Shore and brace excavation as required by safety regulations. Provide temporary bridges to maintain normal traffic flow. Excavation and backfill required by electrical installations shall be accomplished in accordance with Division 2 by this Contractor.
B.
3.06
CUTTING AND PATCHING A. B. Carefully lay out all work in advance to minimize cutting, channeling or drilling. Where necessary, all such cutting and patching shall be done in a manner approved by Architect. Restore damaged surfaces to their original condition by skilled mechanics of the trade involved. Contractor at fault shall assume all cost.
C.
D. Use only rotary type drilling tools to cut concrete. E. Do not endanger the stability of the structure. Do not at any time cut or alter work of any other Contractor without Architect's consent.
3.07
TESTS A. Perform all tests as required by Engineer during construction and as described in other Sections of these Specifications. Testing of entire installation shall be completed before final inspection.
B.
16010-8
3.08
INSTRUCTIONS A. After all required approvals of the Work have been obtained, demonstrate the operation and maintenance of all electrical equipment to the Owner's personnel. Provide written and oral operating and maintenance instructions to Owner's representatives. The oral instructions shall be given before the Owner occupies the buildings. Instructions to include all building's electrical systems and equipment. Copies of written operating and maintenance instructions shall be included with each Record Manual.
B.
C.
D. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with Owner at Owner's convenience, formal instruction time for contractor personnel to instruct Owner's Representatives on all equipment. Provide similar equipment supplier's instructions where specified thus. Formal instruction to occur with each Record Manual, being referenced to and a part of the Manual. E. Formal instructions shall be videotaped when required by other Sections of this Specification by this Contractor. Format shall be VHS or DVD.
3.09
CLEAN UP A. B. Remove all scrap material left on job during and after installation of Work. All equipment having finished paint surfaces shall be examined upon completion for scratches and other damage. Touch up all surfaces as required with paint of color to match factory finish. Perform all cleaning as required by other Sections of Division 16. END OF SECTION
C.
16010-9
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. 1.02 Temporary electricity.
Temporary Facilities & Controls Section 16011 Page 1
PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection 1. Use all means necessary to maintain temporary facilities and controls in proper and safe condition throughout the progress of Work.
B.
Replacements 1. In the event of loss or damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 UTILITIES A. Temporary Facilities 1. 2. 3. General: all costs, including utility company charges, required for the performance of temporary electrical system, shall be paid by Electrical Contractor. Energy charges to be billed to the General Contractor. Temporary Electricity: Electrical Contractor shall: a. Furnish and install all necessary temporary wiring. b. Provide area distribution boxes located so the individual trades may use their own construction type extension cords. c. Provide GFCI protection on all temporary power per NEC. END OF SECTION
16011-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1.
Identification Section 16040 Page 1
Label electrical equipment as required by Codes and Specifications and as specifically directed by Engineer.
B.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. General Provisions Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Cabinets Wiring Devices Motor Starters Panelboards Disconnect Switches Fuses Section 16010 Section 16130 Section 16133 Section 16140 Section 16155 Section 16160 Section 16170 Section 16181
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PANEL DIRECTORIES A. 2.02 Include directory cards with panelboards.
NAMEPLATES A. B. C. Machine engraved black laminate with white core, except as otherwise indicated. Minimum letter size: 1/8". Minimum plate size: 1" X 3".
2.03
VOLTAGE MARKERS A. B. Vinyl impregnated cloth markers with legend as required. Manufacturer: Ideal #44-360, or equivalent.
2.04
PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE A. B. Use only when specifically referred to in other Sections. Manufacturer: Dymo, or equivalent.
16040-1
Identification Section 16040 Page 2
2.05
UNGROUNDED CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. B. As per NEC 210.5(C) and 215.12(C). Typewritten cards behind plastic shield, affixed with double-stick carpet tape. Heat surface prior to affixing directory.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Directory Cards 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Typewritten only. Hand lettering unacceptable, except at "spares" and "spaces", where neat hand lettering with erasable pencil is required. Indicate type of load and rooms where load occurs. Do not use room numbers as shown on Drawings, but refer to name and numbers on door. Do not identify until final load balancing is accomplished.
Nameplates 1. 2. Apply plumb and level with two counter-sunk screws. Glue, double-stick tape, or similar adhesive not acceptable.
C.
Device Plates 1. 2. Machine engrave directly on plate in lieu of separate nameplate. Fill inscriptions with contrasting color.
D. Voltage Markers 1. Not visible in finished areas. END OF SECTION
16040-2
Raceways Section 16110 Page 1
Provide all conduit systems as shown on Drawings or required by Codes and Specifications.
B.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. General Provisions Conductors Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Section 16010 Section 16120 Section 16130
C.
Description of System. 1. Provide code-conforming raceway system for all conductors unless specifically noted otherwise by phrase "not in conduit".
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings 1. Maintain accurate record drawings for all raceway runs in accordance with Section 16010.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. B. Metallic conduit and tubing: Allied Tube & Conduit, Republic Conduit, or equivalent. Non-metallic conduit: Carlon Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 where require, Allied Tube & Conduit, Cantex Inc., or equivalent. Flexible metal conduit: Aluminum.
C.
D. Liquidtight, flexible metal conduit: Anaconda Sealtite or equivalent. E. Fittings 1. Rigid metal conduit: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, or equivalent. Pot metal condulet fittings not acceptable.
16110-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 2.
3. 4.
EMT: a. Steel. b. Setscrew or watertight as required. c. Thomas and Betts Company, or equivalent. d. Pot metal, Sock-on and indentor fittings not acceptable. Flexible metal conduit: STEEL, Thomas and Betts Company XC-400 series, or equivalent. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit: a. Steel. b. Straight or angled as required. c. Appleton, Thomas and Betts Company or equivalent.
F.
Hangers and Supports 1. 2. 3. As required by Codes and Specifications. Raco, Unistrut, or equivalent. Erico conduit clips, Type 8-M, 12-M and K-8 acceptable for individual branch circuit runs.
G.
Metal Surface Raceway 1. 2. 3. Wiremold 500/700 metallic series or equivalent, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Provide associated fittings as required. Standard color as selected by the Architect.
H.
Wireway 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. UL 870 listing throughout, including connectors and fittings. Hinged cover construction. Sealing capability where required. Suitable for "lay-in" installation of conductors. Rust inhibiting phosphatizing undercoat and baked enamel finish. Plated hardware. Square D "Square Duct" or equivalent.
I.
Expansion Fittings 1. 2. Metallic: OZ, Thomas and Betts Company, or equivalent. Non-Metallic: Carlon, or equivalent.
J.
Firestop Assemblies 1. 2. Fire stop systems shall consist of fittings and/or intumescent materials assembled as per UL (or other NRTL) System Details Product manufacturers: 3M, Chase Technology Corporation, Dow Corning Fire Stop, Hilti, International Protective Coatings Corp. (Flame Safe), Nelson Fire Stop Systems. 16110-2
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico K. Thru Wall and Floor Seals 1. OZ Type "FSK" or equal.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Electrically continuous throughout. Plumb and level. Cut square and reamed smooth. Use commercial bender for offsets and bends. Cap to prevent debris from entering during construction. Swab conduit prior to installation of conductor. Provide pull cord in empty conduits. Alter conduit routing to avoid structural obstructions, minimizing crossovers. It is the intent of this Specification to provide reasonable provisions for future expansion of electrical use (See NEC 90.8 and 90.1(B), FPN). Therefore, install all branch circuit home runs as shown on Drawings. Do not combine home runs or increase quantity of conductors therein. 10. Install raceway, conduit and fittings in accordance with Code, UL listing and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Concealed Interior Raceway 1. 2. 3. 4. Conceal all raceway within building construction. May be run in a direct line for Contractor's convenience. For Contractor's convenience, concealed stubs from concrete-encased PVC conduit runs may extend to first concealed junction box. Where applicable, center within insulation any electrical conduit routed in attic space. Provide sealing as per NEC 300.7(A) for all conduits exposed to different temperatures.
C.
Exposed Interior Raceway 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Use limited to mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, motor connections, and panelboards scheduled as surface. Shall not be used in finished area. Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Provide RGSC or EMT stubs for concrete-encased PVC conduit runs. Extend stub from RGSC coupling set flush in floor. Provide flexible conduit as required for motor and equipment connections.
16110-3
D. Concrete Encased Raceway 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Shall not interfere with structural integrity of slab, column, or beam. Installation subject to acceptance of Structural Engineer. Maximum diameter 1/3 thickness of concrete member. Install in center of section. Provide expansion fitting when crossing building expansion joint. Grounding integrity of raceway to be maintained.
E.
Exterior Raceway 1. 2. 3. 4. Minimum 24" below grade. PVC unless otherwise indicated. Exterior surface stubs for PVC conduit runs: RGSC, including final underground sweep. Exterior surface stubs acceptable only where specifically shown. Penetrating Watertight Walls or Floors: Provide block-out with 1/2" clearance around conduit for underground penetrations. Pack with Oakum and caulk with non-shrinking grout, or provide conduit entrance seal. Penetrating Roof or Waterproofing Membranes: Provide flashing and pitch pocket. Contractor responsible for providing a watertight penetration. Coat RGSC penetrations with heavy asphaltic-base compound. Unless otherwise indicated, route exterior conduits to interior distribution equipment concealed under slab.
5. 6. 7. 8.
F.
Supports 1. 2. 3. Refer to NEC 300.11 Tie wire supports not acceptable. Support Spacing: NEC.
G.
Specific Locations 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Allow 6" minimum clearance at flues, steam pipes and heat sources. Conduit visible behind grills and registers: paint black. Seal conduit where leaving heated area and entering unheated area. Penetrating non-watertight walls or floors: Pack space between conduit and block-out on both sides with Oakum. Penetrating fire rated walls or floors: Seal to prevent passage of fire or products of combustion. From each flush mounted panel location, stub three additional 3/4" conduits into nearest accessible ceiling space. Do not mount raceway on ductwork, cover access doors, panels, controls, or otherwise hinder normal maintenance and repair of the equipment.
16110-4
Motors: a. Connect to motor feeder or branch circuit by means of flexible metal conduit or liquidtight flexible metal conduit in moist areas. b. Minimum flexible length: 18". c. Where practical, feed floor mounted motors from raceway installed in or under slab. d. When floor mounted motors are fed overhead, provide required support for raceway. Extend raceway to floor and provide a floor flange. Insert "T" condulet fitting at proper height and extend flexible conduit to motor.
3.02
SIZE A. B. National Electrical Code, subject to stated minimums. Minimum Size 1. 2. 3. Exterior raceway: 3/4". In or under poured concrete: 3/4". Branch circuit home run: 3/4". Consider home run to include raceway length from panelboard, switchboard, or motor control center to nearest power consuming or switching device on that circuit. Feeders: 3/4". All others not listed: 1/2".
4. 5. 3.03 TYPE A.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 1. 2. 3. May be used in place of rigid galvanized steel conduit for Contractor's convenience. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for bending, threading and cutting operations. Install as specified for rigid galvanized steel conduit.
B.
Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGSC) 1. Use: a. Overhead electric and telephone service entrance. IMC or Aluminum not acceptable for this application. b. All raceway exposed to weather. Aluminum not acceptable for this application. c. Where required by national, state and local codes. Fittings: Threaded except at KO type boxes where double locknut/bushing method acceptable. Waterproof entire length with heavy asphaltic base compound when: a. Embedded directly in earth. b. Embedded in concrete directly in contact with earth, with or without vapor barrier. c. Penetrations run directly from concrete with earth, to soil burial. Factory applied PVC coating acceptable in place of asphaltic base compound. 16110-5
2. 3.
4.
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico C. Rigid Non-ferrous Metal Conduit (Aluminum) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
May be used in place of RGSC for Contractor's convenience. Do not use where conduit is embedded in concrete slabs, where installed in direct contact with outside walls below grade, or in exterior applications. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for bending, threading and cutting operations. Use an approved lubricant at all couplings and threaded connections. Wrap conduit with a layer of half-lapped PVC tape where passing through concrete or masonry walls or floors. Pull large conductors in 2" or larger conduit with propylene or equivalent rope. 90 degree bends may be steel where pulling tensions are high. Smaller conductors may be pulled with similar ropes or fish tapes, except that flat steel fish tapes shall not be used.
D. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (PVC) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Use only in slabs and exterior underground locations. See 3.01 B3, C4 and E3 for limitations. Provide insulating bushing at all terminal adapters. Provide equipment grounding conductor within raceway. Increase trade size accordingly for equipment grounding conductor. Utilize commercial heating element type bending equipment. Do not use torches to bend PVC conduit.
E.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 1. 2. 3. Use in all areas not prohibited by NEC and this Specification. Do not use in concrete slabs on or under grade, or walls under grade. Do not use in exterior underground applications.
F.
Flexible Metal Conduit 1. 2. Use for connections to transformers, motors, fixed appliances, recessed luminaires and other equipment as required. Use liquidtight conduit with liquidtight fittings in areas of high moisture content.
G.
Metal Surface Raceway 1. 2. 3. Install complete with matching boxes, fittings, and end caps, parallel or perpendicular to building construction. Wire adjacent devices to alternate circuits where metal surface raceway contains devices integral to the channel. Feed from flush connector in wall directly into raceway. Field cut base as required with 1/2" knockout for this purpose. Do not use Wiremold catalog #2051H for 2000/2100 series.
16110-6
H.
Fire Resistive Walls and Decks 1. 2. 3. Preserve integrity of fire rating through the use of UL-Listed (or other NRTL) firestop assemblies of appropriate penetration type and rating time. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All floor to floor penetrations and all wall penetrations into Mechanical, Electrical, and Communications Rooms shall be sealed with one-hour firestop assemblies unless more stringent rating is required by Building Codes. Include UL (or other NRTL) firestop assembly sheets and manufacturer product data sheets specifically used with the Project Close-out Documentations. END OF SECTION
4.
16110-7
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. B. Provide a complete system of conductors enclosed in a raceway.
Conductors Section 16120 Page 1
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. General Provisions Raceways Cable Tray Section 16010 Section 16110 Section 16114
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings 1. Maintain accurate record drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR A. Copper 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.02 Soft drawn, annealed. Conductivity of not less than 98% pure copper. Insulated for 600 volt service. #10 AWG and smaller: Solid, THWN/THHN. #8 AWG and larger: Stranded, THWN/THHN. Provide USE where required by Code.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) CABLE A. Non-armored, Type TC cable with 85 percent tinned copper braid, 100 percent foil shield, and full size copper drain wire. XLPE conductor insulation for 600 volt service. Manufacturer: Belden 29500 series or equivalent.
B. C. 2.03
SPLICES A. #10 AWG and smaller: Scotchlock Y, R or G as manufactured by 3M Company, or equivalent.
16120-1
#8 AWG and larger: Compression type, as manufactured by Anderson, Burndy, Thomas and Betts Company, or equivalent.
2.04
LUBRICANT A. General 1. 2. 3. B. NRTL-listed. Flame resistant Compatible with conductor insulation.
Acceptable Manufacturer 1. As selected by Contractor.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. Install in accordance with Code, product listing, and manufacturer's recommendations. Install wire and cable in Code-conforming raceways after moisture and debris is swabbed from conduit. Refer to system specified for conductors peculiar to that system. Conductor sizes: Standard AWG, #12 minimum unless otherwise indicated. Fixture taps: minimum #16 AWG. Conductor temperature ratings: Compatible with the equipment to which it is to be connected. Refer to product listing. Make conductor length for parallel feeders identical. Derate ampacities as required for high ambient temperatures or conductor fill.
Color 1. Multi-wire (shared neutral) circuits: a. 120/208 volt 1) Phase conductors: Black, red or blue. 2) Grounded conductor (neutral): White. 3) Grounding conductor: Green or bare. b. 277/480 volt 1) Phase conductors: Yellow, brown or orange. 2) Grounded conductor (neutral): Gray. 3) Grounding conductor: Green or bare. Separate neutral circuits: a. 120/208 volt 1) Phase conductors: Black, red or blue. 2) Grounded conductor (neutral): White with stripe colored to match phase. 16120-2
2.
b.
3. 4.
3) Grounding conductor: Green or bare. 277/480 volt 1) Phase conductors: Brown, orange or yellow. 2) Grounded conductor (neutral): Gray with stripe colored to match phase. 3) Grounding conductor: Green or bare. Switch legs: Same as phase conductors. 120 volt isolated ground circuits. a. Phase conductors: Orange. 1) Grounded conductor (neutral): White with orange stripe. 2) Grounding conductor: Green with yellow stripe.
C.
Splices 1. 2. 3. Eliminate wherever possible. Made only at outlet or junction boxes. Obtain special permission from Engineer for any splices in feeder conductors.
D. Voltage Drop 1. 2. Increase size of circuit wiring in accordance with NEC 210.19(A)(1), FPN, No. 4. Use #10 AWG minimum for all home run conductors longer than 75 feet on 120/208/240 systems and 150 feet on 277/480 systems.
E.
VFD Cable 1. 2. 3. 4. Use only on feeder lengths over 75 feet. Install cable from load terminals of VFD to motor. Enclose cable in non-metallic raceway system (conduit and flexible conduit). Terminate the drain wire to the ground lug at both the VFD and the motor
3.02
TESTS A. After equipment and wiring is installed, and before it is energized, test all power circuits with a megohmeter for insulation resistance, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground faults. Before testing, disconnect all equipment that might be damaged by the test voltages. END OF SECTION
B.
16120-3
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. B.
Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Section 16130 Page 1
Provide all outlet, pull and junction boxes complete with associated covers and rings.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. General Provisions Raceways Conductors Wiring Devices and Device Plates Section 16010 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16140
C.
Work Installed But Furnished Under Other Directives. 1. Obtain manufacturer's backboxes or recommendations for special equipment.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings 1. Maintain accurate record drawings in accordance with Section 16010.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING BOXES A. Flush and Surface 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.02 2-1/8" minimum depth. Square or octagon as required. Galvanized steel. Manufacturer: Appleton, Raco, Steel City or equivalent.
WALL BOXES A. Flush 1. 2. 3. 4. One and two gang wall boxes: 4" square box, 2-1/8" minimum depth with appropriate plaster or tile ring. More than three gang: Gangable 3-1/2" deep unless wall cavity limits depth to 2-1/2". Use 4-11/16" square boxes where required by Code. Single gang masonry boxes acceptable only for single conduit entrance. Feed-through circuiting not acceptable. Use 4" square box/tile ring for feed-through applications.
16130-1
B.
Surface Mounted Devices 1. 2. 4" square box, 2-1/8" minimum depth with appropriate 1/2" raised cover. Manufacturer: Appleton, B-Line, Raco, Steel City, Wiegmann, or equivalent.
C. 2.03
Sectional, through wall and handy boxes not acceptable.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. B. C. Galvanized steel with cover. Size: National Electrical Code. Manufacturer: Appleton, Raco, Hoffman, Shallbetter, Steel City, Wadsworth or equivalent.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Install in accordance with code, product listing and manufacturer's recommendations. Install boxes plumb, level and flush with finish surface. Support securely and rigidly. Verify wall depths to ensure adequate clearance for special backboxes. Provide barriers in ganged switch outlets where voltage between adjacent switches exceeds 300 volts.
B.
Location 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Governed by structural conditions and obstructions. Mount switch outlet on strike side of door, maximum 4" from door opening to first switch. Verify door swing with Architectural Plan. Coordinate equipment outlets prior to installation for proper concealment. Center outlets with respect to acoustical tile, paneling and furring trim. Adjust outlets in masonry or tile construction to horizontal and vertical mortar joints. Clear all piping, ductwork and other obstructions. For outlet boxes on opposite sides of walls or partitions with separation distances of 24" or less, pack all interconnecting conduits with Duxseal after conductor installation, to prevent sound transmission. Outlet boxes improperly located shall be corrected at Contractor's expense.
8. C.
Mounting Heights 1. All device mounting heights shall conform to ADAABAAG (Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines 36 CFR, Part
16130-2
2. 3. 4. 5.
1191), including using ADAABAAG Child Anthropometrics, as clarified in Bureau of Indian Affairs Office of Facilities Management and Construction, School Facilities Management and Construction, School Facilities Design Handbook/Space Templates, issued June 25, 2007. Refer to Standard Electrical Symbol Legend for nominal mounting heights. Verify height of all outlets to ensure installation above top of radiation covers, mirrors, counters and any other obstructions that may alter nominal mounting height. Measure from finish floor to centerline of outlet. Mount exterior outlets horizontally. Measure height from nearest interior finish floor below outlet. Mount outlet designated AC (above counter) no less than 4" higher than top of countertop backsplash.
D. Fire Resistive Walls and Ceilings 1. Penetrations for steel electrical outlet boxes permitted, provided: a. Boxes do not exceed 16 square inches in area. b. Area of such openings to not exceed 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of area. c. Outlet boxes on opposite sides of walls or partitions separated by horizontal distance of 24 inches.
E.
Pull and Junction Boxes 1. 2. 3. Pull and junction boxes are generally not indicated on Drawings. Install in accordance with National Electrical Code and as required to facilitate wire pulling. Do not install in finished spaces without approval of Engineer.
F.
Identification 1. 2. Identify pull and junction boxes containing system voltages in excess of 250 volts to ground with voltage markers. Voltage markers: Not visible in finished areas. END OF SECTION
16130-3
Cabinets Section 16133 Page 1
PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Provide spare fuse cabinets as called for in this Specification. Provide cabinets for current transformers and transition enclosures for utility company terminations required by utility company or as shown on the feeder riser diagram. Provide special systems cabinets as shown on the Plans, Risers and Specifications.
B.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. Panelboards Fuses Electric Service Section 16160 Section 16181 Section 16410
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010 for all special cabinets with the exception of spare fuse cabinets.
B.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010 for all special cabinets with the exception of spare fuse cabinets. Include installation and maintenance instructions accompanying the equipment.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPARE FUSE CABINET A. Construction 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Welded steel or .080 gauge aluminum. Gray enamel finish. Locking handle/cylinder lock. Integral shelving.
Size: Minimum 30" H x 24" W X 12" D.
16133-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico C.
Acceptable Manufacturers: American Midwest Power SFC 36, B-Line 243012FC, Bussmann SFC, Gould Shawmut GSFC, or Littelfuse LSFC.
2.02
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT CABINETS A. Construction 1. B. C. Panelboard construction, or as called out in System Specification.
Size: As indicated in Specifications or shown on Drawings. Acceptable Manufacturer: specification. Panelboard manufacturer, or as called out in system
2.03
CURRENT TRANSFORMER CABINETS A. Construction 1. 2. 3. 4. B. NEMA 3R. 14-gauge galvanized steel. Gray enamel finish, or as required by serving utility. Single hinge cover with combination padlock and sealing wire.
Bus Assembly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Amperage as indicated on Drawings. Copper bus bar. Glaskyd insulator supports. Combination disconnect/connector kit. Window CT bus link kit. Compression lugs.
C.
Combination Back Pan 1. 2. Galvanized steel Prepunched to accept bar type current transformers.
D. Manufacturer: American Midwest Power, Inc., Electro Mechanical Industries, Inc., or States Electric Mfg. Co. 2.04 TRANSITION CABINETS A. Construction 1. 12-gauge galvanized phosphated steel.
16133-2
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Primed and painted one coat forest green enamel. Lift off covers - both sides. Padlocking handle with two point latch mechanism. Penta head sealing bolt. No trough openings, or furnish NEMA 3R cover plates.
Bus Assembly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Amperage as indicated on Drawings. Copper bus bar. Prepunched to NEMA standards for up to five utility company lugs. Compression lugs on load side. Ground stud.
C.
Manufacturer: Shallbetter CB series, or equal by American Midwest Power, Inc., Electro Mechanical Industries, Inc., or States Electric Mfg. Co.
2.05
PLYWOOD BACKING A. 3/4" grade AD, fire resistant, painted gray (including edges).
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. 3.02 Store cabinets in a cool, dry space prior to installation.
INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Install cabinets in accordance with Code, product listing and manufacturer's recommendations. Install where shown on Drawings. Plumb and level. Top of trim 6'-3" above finished floor. Stub three additional 3/4" conduits into nearest ceiling space from flush cabinets. Provide 3/4" plywood backing for surface cabinets. Mount spare fuse cabinet adjacent to main switchboard.
16133-3
3.03
IDENTIFICATION A. B. Identify cabinets with nameplates in accordance with Section 16040. Inscription as directed by Engineer.
3.04
CLEAN UP A. B. Clean and vacuum interior to remove all wire and insulation scraps, dust and dirt. Clean all exposed surfaces immediately prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION
16133-4
Wiring Devices and Device Plates Section 16140 Page 1
Provide wiring devices complete with device plates of matching or specified color. Wiring devices include receptacles for the connection of portable equipment and switches used for the control of both lighting and fractional horsepower motor loads. Also included are dimmers, occupancy sensors, photoelectric switches and time switches.
B.
Related Equipment Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. General Provisions Identification Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Motor Starters Luminaires Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16130 Section 16155 Section 16510
C.
Work Installed But Furnished by Others 1. Where indicated, install devices furnished by other Divisions of this Specification.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. B. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Provide information in accordance with Section 16010. Include installation and maintenance instructions accompanying the equipment.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Device color: Gray or as selected by Architect. Verify with Architect. (Exception: Red devices on emergency circuits where applicable). All devices shall be of the same manufacturer, except where specifically noted otherwise with the phrase "NO SUBSTITUTION".
B.
16140-1
2.02
SWITCHES A. AC Toggle and Keyed Switches 1. 2. 20-ampere 120/277 volt AC and HP rated, industrial specification-grade. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bryant 4900 series b. Cooper 2220 series c. General Electric 5950 series d. Hubbell 1220 series e. Leviton 1220 series f. Pass & Seymour PS20AC series
B.
Pilot Light Switches 1. 2. 3. 4. Neon lamp in red toggle handle, lit in "on" position. 20 ampere, 120/277 volt AC rated. Manufacturer: Bryant #4901PLR series. Other acceptable manufacturers: As listed above.
C.
Time Switches 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. DPST switching, voltage rating as required. Digital display with 7-Day programming. Non-volatile program memory (battery backup unacceptable). Manufacturer: Tork #EW100S series. Other acceptable manufacturer: Paragon. Special units as shown on Drawings.
D. Remote Photoelectric Switches 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E. Threaded swivel mounting with locking nut and neoprene gasket. Light level adjustment slide. Activation: 1-5 footcandle on, 3-15 footcandle off. Manufacturer: Intermatic #K4200 series, wattage and voltage as required. Other acceptable manufacturers: Paragon, Area Lighting Research, Precision, or Tork.
Spring Wound Timer Switch 1. 2. 3. As shown on Drawings. Manufacturer: Intermatic. Other acceptable manufacturers: Area Lighting Research, Rhodes Mark Time, or Tork.
16140-2
F.
Occupancy Sensors 1. Ceiling Mount Low Voltage a. Sensor: 1) Self-contained low voltage unit obtaining 15-24 VDC power from external power pack. 2) Passive dual technology sensing combining passive infrared with microphone or sound signals. 3) Ceiling-mount with 360 conical pattern coverage. 4) Adjustable time delay, from 0.5 to 20 minutes, to keep lights ON during brief periods of no activity. 5) Green LED activity Indicator. 6) Manufacturer: As scheduled on the drawings. b. Power Pack: 1) Transforms an input voltage of 120, 240 or 277 VAC to Class 2 15-24 VAC/VDC to power remote sensors. 2) Integral 20 amp line voltage relay with relay protection. Where circuit loads exceed 1920 watts @ 120 VAC or 4432 watts @ 277 VAC, provide two-pole power pack or additional single pole power packs as required. 3) Provide quantities as required. 4) Manufacturer: As scheduled on the drawings.
2.03
RECEPTACLES A. General Purpose 1. 2. 20 ampere, self-grounding, NEMA 5-20R, industrial specification grade. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bryant 5362 series b. Cooper 5362 series c. General Electric 5362 series d. Hubbell 5362 series e. Leviton 5362 series f. Pass & Seymour 5362 series
B.
Tamper-resistant (Security Type) 1. 2. 3. 4. 15 ampere, self-grounding, NEMA 5-15R. Energized only when two blade or three blade grounding cord cap is properly inserted. Use only where indicated on the Drawings. Manufacturer: Leviton #8200-SG series, Hubbell #HBL8200SG series, or equal.
C.
GFCI 1. 2. 3. 20 ampere, feed-through type. Two utilization points per device, with vertical orientation. Manufacturer: As listed above. 16140-3
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico D. Surge Suppression Receptacle 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E.
20 ampere. Power-on indicator light. Damage alert: Audible or visual annunciation to indicate surge protection no longer functional. Three-mode protection: Line-to-neutral, line-to-ground, and neutral-to-ground. Manufacturer: Bryant, Cooper, Hubbell, Leviton, and Pass & Seymour.
Hospital-grade 1. 2. 3. 4. 20-ampere, self-grounding, NEMA 5-20R, hospital-grade High-impact, chemical-resistant nylon construction. Provide where indicated on the Drawings, or where required by Code. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bryant 8300 series b. Cooper 8300 series c. General Electric 8300 series d. Hubbell 8300 series e. Leviton 8300 series f. Pass & Seymour 8300 series
F.
Damp & Wet Locations 1. 2. All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt non-locking receptacles shall be listed weather-resistant type as per NEC 406-8. Manufacturer: As listed above.
2.04
DIMMERS A. Incandescent 1. 2. 3. Solid state. 2000 watts unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturer: Lutron Nova slide-to-off series.
2.05
DEVICE PLATES A. Flush Interior 1. 2. 3. 4. Opening for device intended. 430 stainless steel, or as selected by Architect. Manufacturer: Pass & Seymour "S" series or equivalent. Where plastic plates are selected by Architect, provide thermoplastic type.
16140-4
B.
Surface Interior 1. 1/2" raised cover
C.
Damp & Wet Locations 1. Damp locations: a. Refer to NEC 406.8(A). b. Die-cast aluminum construction with stainless steel springs. c. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, Manufacturer: Pass & Seymour #4500 series or equivalent. Wet locations: a. Refer to NEC 406.8(B). b. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, Manufacturer: Red Dot #CKMG (horizontal) or #CKSGV (vertical) series, or equal by Hubbell. Turn over to Division 9 Contractor for painting prior to installation.
2.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Install device and plates where shown on Drawings in accordance with Code, product listing and manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to Section 16130-3.01C for mounting heights. Plumb and level. Tight to wall. Thoroughly cover wall opening around device. Replace all devices and plates that become discolored or burned during construction. Provide blank plates for unused openings. Connect wiring devices by means of single conductor tails. Multiple wire connections not acceptable. Tighten unused connection screws.
Identification 1. 2. Identify wall switches which control lighting or equipment not in sight. Refer to Section 16040-3.01C.
C.
Receptacles 1. 2. Vertical mounting with grounding pole at bottom. Provide GFCI receptacles at NEC 210.8 locations.
16140-5
D. Dimmers 1. 2. 3. E. No common neutrals. Individually mounted: No gang mounting. Do not remove any fins.
Photoelectric Switches 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Install on roof, in center of structure where viewing from ground is minimal. Verify exact location with Architect. Penetrate roof with 3/4" RGSC, securely fastened to structure. Provide flashing to maintain roof integrity. Mount 18" above finished roof surface. Make connections in weatherproof junction box.
F.
Occupancy Sensors 1. 2. Provide adequate supports to any structures, ceilings and grid system to safely attach sensors. Mount external power packs (required only for low voltage sensors) within junction box in accessible ceiling space.
3.02
TESTS A. B. Proper operation of lighting switches, dimmers and occupancy sensors. Duplex Receptacles 1. 2. Proper connections. Test all receptacles with NRTL-listed receptacle circuit tester similar to Bryant #5266PT, or Ideal #EZ Check.
3.03
INSTRUCTIONS A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation, setting, and maintenance of time switches, dimmers, occupancy sensors, and GFCI receptacles. END OF SECTION
16140-6
Motor Starters Section 16155 Page 1
Provide motor starters where shown and scheduled, or as required by Code.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. General Provisions Identification Raceways Conductors Wiring Devices Panelboards Disconnects Fuses Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16140 Section 16160 Section 16170 Section 16181
In general, motors less than 1/2 HP shall be 115 volts, single phase and motors of 1/2 HP and larger shall be three phase. C. Work Installed But Furnished Under Other Directives 1. Refer to Section 16010, Article 1.01, Paragraph D for extent of control devices furnished in other Divisions.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. 2. 3. B. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Show all details including electrical ratings, controls, schematic wiring diagrams, enclosure dimensions and other pertinent data. Indicate on submittal exact motor or equipment served.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Include installation and maintenance instructions accompanying the equipment.
16155-1
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. B. C. Product of same manufacturer. Sizing based upon Siemens equipment. Other acceptable manufacturers: Equal units by Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, and Square D.
D. Contractor is cautioned to verify all physical dimensions of "equal" units prior to accepting quotation for Bid. 2.02 SINGLE PHASE MOTORS WITH INTEGRAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION A. 2.03 Horsepower rated toggle switch, pilot handle where not in sight from motor.
SINGLE PHASE MOTORS WITHOUT INTEGRAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION A. Manual Motor Starter 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Manually operated toggle switch with integral overload protection. Rendered inoperative unless thermal unit is in position. Provide pilot light for manual starters not in sight from motor. Provide flush-mounted starters with stainless steel plates. NEMA 1 enclosures for surface-mounted starters unless otherwise required by environment.
B.
Fused Toggle Switch 1. 2. 3. 4. 4" square box mounting. Complete with fuse adapter and plug fuse of correct rating. Manufacturer: Bussmann or Reliance. Use only where specifically shown.
2.04
THREE PHASE AND SPECIFIED SINGLE PHASE MOTORS A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. Across-the-line magnetic type, unless otherwise scheduled. Rated in accordance with NEMA standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Provide combination fusible unit with Class R fuse holders, where disconnect and starter are shown at the same location. Minimum size: NEMA size 0.
16155-2
Manufacturer's series: Siemens Class 17 series, or equal units by Allen Bradley (512 series), Cutler Hammer (AN30 series) or equivalent Advantage series, and Square D (8538 series).
B.
Control 1. 2. 120 volt control transformer Control fusing: a. 250 volt - in accordance with NEC. b. 600 volt - primary and secondary fusing regardless of VA rating of control transformer. Cover-mounted devices for single-speed starters: a. Transformer operated LED green pilot light for running indication, with push-totest feature. b. H-O-A selector switch, unless otherwise scheduled. Cover-mounted devices for two-speed starters: a. Transformer operated LED pilot lights for running indication, with push-to-test feature: Green for low speed, amber for high speed). b. High-low-off-auto selector switch, unless otherwise scheduled. Molded coil construction.
3.
4.
5. C.
Overload Protection exterior locations 1. 2. 3. Resetable overload protection on all phases. Class 20 construction. Starter inoperative if one or more overload units removed.
D. Overload Protection interior locations 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. E. Self-powered. Solid state construction with adjustable overload protection on all phases. Manual reset with capability for remote reset function. Phase loss protection. Ambient-insensitive within operating range of -25C to 55C. Solid state construction, Class 20. Starter inoperative if overload unit is removed.
Electrical Interlocks 1. 2. Space for minimum three, any arrangement NO or NC. Quantity: Two NO per starter.
F.
Solid State Starters 1. 2. 3. Control and interlock options as previously indicated. Dip switch selectable energy savings feature. Phase loss protection. 16155-3
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 2.05
Heavy-duty rating. Temperature: NRTL-listed for 0-50 degree C. maximum ambient. Rated for minimum 10 starts per hour. Solid state reduced voltage type: Siemens 3RW Series. Variable frequency drive type: Siemens 6SE. Other acceptable manufacturers: As previously indicated.
THREE PHASE POWER MONITOR A. Provide for all three phase motors larger than two horsepower, and all three phase compressor equipment. 1. B. C. Not required for motors served by solid state starters or variable frequency drives.
Line voltage to match system. Operating parameters: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Trip: 90% rated voltage on any or all phases. Reset: 93% rated voltage on all three phases. Dead band between trip and reset: 3%. Repeat accuracy: 1% maximum at 0-70 degree C. Trip Delay Time: Two seconds. Reset: Two seconds. Output contact rating: Pilot Duty, 470 VA @ 600 VAC. Transient Protection: 2500 Volts for 10 MS.
D. Special Options 1. 2. E. F. 2.06 NEMA 1 or 3R enclosure as required. Adjustable Time Delayed Restart: 30-300 seconds. Set at 300 seconds.
Manufacturer: Motor Saver Model 350. Other acceptable manufacturers: Cutler-Hammer SVM3 series.
PLYWOOD BACKING FOR SURFACE MOUNTED STARTERS A. 3/4" grade AD, fire-resistant, painted gray (including edges).
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. Store motor starters in cool, dry space prior to installation.
16155-4
3.02
INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Plumb and level. Install motor starters in accordance with Code, product listing and manufacturer's recommendations. Tighten all lugs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Verify correct size overload protection with motor nameplate data and manufacturer's recommendations. Where power factor correction is specified for connection to motor terminals (i.e. load side of overload units), reduce overload rating as per manufacturer's recommendations. Provide 3/4" plywood backing where several controls are shown grouped for surface mounting.
B.
Identification 1. 2. Identify motor starters in accordance with Section 16040. Provide two nameplates for all motor starters: One for starter, other for equipment. Do not mount equipment nameplate on motor. Rather, mount on equipment, in visible location near motor. Do not use motor schedule numbers, but indicate motor or load served. Provide pressure-sensitive tape identification in accordance with Section 16040 and 16181 for all motor starters containing fuses. Indicate proper thermal overload unit by circling correct number on chart affixed to cover of starter. Provide voltage markers for all motor starters containing a system voltage in excess of 250 volts to ground. Voltage markers not required for motor starters which form a part of a motor control center as specified in Section 16920.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
3.03
TESTS A. B. C. Proper operation. Correct rotation. Solid state motor starters 1. 2. Furnish letter of verification to Engineer indicating solid state motor starters have been tested by manufacturers representative. List date of test and name of manufacturers representative.
16155-5
3.04
INSTRUCTIONS A. Manufacturers representative shall instruct Owner in proper maintenance and testing of solid state motor starters. Include name of Owners representative in letter of verification. Videotape instructions and include with Record Manuals in accordance with Section 16010.
B. 3.05
CLEANING A. B. Clean and vacuum interior to remove all wire and insulation scraps, dust and dirt. Clean all exposed surfaces immediately prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION
16155-6
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. B. Provide panelboards where indicated and scheduled.
Panelboards Section 16160 Page 1
Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. General Provisions Identification Raceways Conductors Cabinets Motor Starters Fuses Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16133 Section 16155 Section 16181
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Show all details of: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Lugs. Locations for grounding bar, neutral bar and directory. Main bus amperage and arrangement. Weight and physical dimensions of enclosures. Cover and lock type. Quantity of spaces. Quantity, arrangement, amperage and short circuit withstand ratings in RMS amperes for all circuit breakers. Any other pertinent data. Applicable series rating for this particular riser/fault current combination.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Include installation and maintenance instructions accompanying equipment.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Product of same manufacturer.
16160-1
Sizing and design based upon Siemens equipment; Siemens catalog numbers utilized for reference. Other Acceptable Manufacturers. 1. Equal units by Cutler Hammer or Square D.
C.
D. Contractor is cautioned to verify all physical dimensions of "equal" units prior to accepting quotation for bid. 2.02 GENERAL A. B. C. Provide sub-feed lugs, contactors, main breakers or other equipment as scheduled. Provide copper bus, copper isolated neutral bar and copper grounding bar in all panelboards. Use load centers only where specifically indicated. aluminum neutral and grounding bar. Provide copper bus with plated
D. NRTL-listed, and "suitable for use as service equipment" when required. E. Feeder risers are schematic only and not intended to infer lug arrangements. Contractor to indicate desired lug arrangements and sizes on shop drawings. Connection from load side of main breaker to panel bus shall be bus bar. Insulated wire and backfed types not acceptable. NRTL-recognized series ratings acceptable, with minimum ratings as specified herein.
F.
G. 2.03
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS - 240 VOLTS MAXIMUM (L PREFIX) A. Circuit Breakers 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Bolt-on. Quick-make, quick-break thermal magnetic. Trip indicating. Common trip on multi-pole breakers; handle ties not acceptable. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere ratings to be NRTL-listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120 Volt AC and carry SWD marking. Minimum 10,000 AIC rated.
Bus Assembly 1. 2. 3. 4. Ratings: As scheduled. 98 percent conductivity. "Distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type bus bar connections. Adjacent single pole breakers connected to opposite polarities.
16160-2
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 5. C. Multi-pole breakers installable in any location.
Wiring Terminals 1. NRTL-listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified.
D. Circuit Numbering 1. Starting at top, odd numbers in sequence down lefthand side and even numbers in sequence down righthand side.
E.
Cabinets 1. 2. 3. 4. Enclose bus assembly in steel cabinet. Wiring gutter sizes and steel gauge in accordance with NEMA and NRTL standards. Fabricate box from galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel. Furnish without pre-punched knockouts.
F.
Fronts 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Code gauge, full finished steel with rust inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish. Not removable with door in locked position. Adjustable trim clamps. Concealed steel hinges. Door with tumbler-type cylinder lock, catch, and spring-loaded door pull. Flush lock not to protrude beyond door front. Key all locks alike. Circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic covering on inside of door.
G.
Manufacturer 1. Siemens Sentron series.
2.04
CIRCUIT BREAKER LIGHTING PANELBOARDS 277/480 VOLTS (H PREFIX) A. Circuit Breakers 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Bolt-on. Quick-make, quick-break, thermal magnetic. Trip indicating. Common trip on multi-pole breakers; handle ties not acceptable. Provisions for additional breakers such that field addition of connectors or mounting hardware will not be required. Minimum 14,000 AIC rated.
16160-3
B.
Bus Assembly and Temperature Rise 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Rating: As scheduled. 98 percent conductivity. "Distributed phase" or "Phase sequence" type bus bar connections. Adjacent single pole breakers connected to opposite polarities. Multi-pole breakers installable in any location.
C.
Wiring Terminals 1. NRTL-listed as suitable for type of conductor specified.
D. Circuit Numbering 1. Starting at top, odd numbers in sequence down lefthand side and even numbers in sequence down righthand side.
E.
Cabinet 1. 2. 3. 4. Enclose bus assembly in steel cabinet. Wiring gutter sizes and steel gauge in accordance with NEMA and NRTL standards. Fabricate box from galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel. Furnish without pre-punched knockouts.
F.
Fronts 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Code gauge, full finished steel with rust inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish. Not removable with door in locked position. Adjustable trim clamps. Concealed steel hinges. Door with tumbler-type cylinder lock, catch and spring-loaded door pull. Flush lock not to protrude beyond door front. Key all locks alike. Circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic covering on inside of door.
G.
2.05
CIRCUIT BREAKER POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 120/208 OR 277/480 VOLTS (LDP OR HDP PREFIX) A. Circuit Breakers 1. 2. Bolt-on. Quick-make, quick-break thermal magnetic.
16160-4
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B.
Trip indicating. Common trip on multi-pole breakers; handle ties not acceptable. Equipped with individually insulated braces and protected connectors. Front faces of all circuit breakers to be flush with each other. Affix large, permanent, individual circuit numbers to each breaker in uniform position. Minimum 14,000 AIC rated.
Bus Assembly and Temperature Rise 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Rating: As scheduled. Insulated bus structure. 98 percent conductivity. "Distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type bus bar connections. Adjacent single pole breakers connected to opposite polarities.
C.
Wiring terminals 1. NRTL-listed as suitable for type of conductor specified.
D. Cabinet 1. 2. 3. 4. E. Enclose bus assembly in steel cabinet. Wiring gutter sizes and steel gauge in accordance with NEMA and NRTL standards. Fabricate box from galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel. Furnish without pre-punched knock-outs.
Fronts 1. 2. Minimum 12-gauge, full finished steel with rust inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish. Circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic covering.
F.
Safety Barriers 1. As required by UL or other NRTL.
G.
2.06
INTEGRATED TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR (TVSS) A. B. Provided only in panelboards as indicated on the drawings. The panelboard manufacturer shall internally install TVSS protection within the panelboard and the entire assembly shall be UL 67 listed.
16160-5
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico C. TVSS requirements: 1. 2.
3. 4.
5.
6. 7.
Listed and component recognized in accordance with UL 1449 2nd Edition and UL 1283. UL 1449 2nd Edition tested and listed to 200kA Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) in compliance with NEC 285.6. TVSS devices obtaining SCCRs using upstream over current protection are prohibited. Tested with the Category C3 high exposure waveform (20kV-50s,10kA-8/20s) per ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991. Self contained module design, with each suppression element MOV based. Each phase of the surge current diversion module shall be protected using 200kAIR, 30A surge rated fuses and thermal cutouts. Surge current diversion paths between each phase conductor and the neutral conductor, between each phase conductor and the ground and between the neutral conductor and ground. For delta configured systems, the TVSS shall have components connected between each phase conductor and between each phase conductor and ground. Incorporate copper bus bars for the surge path. Surge current diversion module shall be bolted directly to the bus bars of the panelboard for reliable low impedance connections. Meet or exceed the following: a. Surge capacity (single pulse rated) shall be as indicated on the Drawings. b. Endurance Testing. Capable of protecting against and surviving 9000 ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C transients without failure. c. UL 1449 2nd Edition listed and recognized component suppression voltage ratings shall not exceed: VOLTAGE 208Y/120 480Y/277 d. L-N 400V 800V L-G 400V 800V N-G 400V 800V L-L 400V 800V
The ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 let through voltages shall not exceed: VOLTAGE 208Y/120 480Y/277 L-N 560V 960V L-G 560V 960V N-G 352V 960V
e. f.
Designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage. A minimum EMI/RFI filtering of -50dB at 100kHz.
16160-6
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico g.
h. i.
j.
Equipped with on board visual and audible diagnostic monitoring. Indicating lights shall provide full time visual diagnostic monitoring of the operational status of each phase of the surge current diversion module. An amber indicator light will indicate reduced suppression capability. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible alarm. This alarm shall activate upon a fault condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. An alarm push-to-test switch shall be provided. The TVSS diagnostic monitoring devices shall be mounted on the front cover of the panel board. The diagnostic monitoring circuits shall continually monitor the operational status of the surge current diversion module. A diagnostic system push-to-test switch shall be provided. A set of Form C dry contacts shall be provided for remote annunciation. No other test equipment shall be required for TVSS monitoring or testing before or after installation. A response time no greater than 1/2 nanosecond for any of the individual. Equipped with transient event surge counter located on the front cover of the panelboard. Counter shall indicate surges, swells, outages and sags and shall count each. Counter shall be equipped with a manual reset and a battery to retain memory upon loss of AC power. Warranty: The panelboard manufacturer shall warranty the TVSS for full replacement if destroyed by transients for a period of ten (10) years.
2.07
CABLE TIES A. Thomas and Betts Company "Ty-Rap" or equivalent.
2.08
PLYWOOD BACKING FOR SURFACE MOUNTED PANELBOARDS. A. 3/4" grade AD, fire-resistant, painted gray (including edges).
2.09
PANEL SKIRTS (COVERS) A. B. C. Required for bottom of all surface panelboards. Minimum 14-gauge. Primed and painted to match panelboard.
D. Same width and depth as panelboard. Single skirt acceptable for double panels. E. To span distance between finish floor and bottom of panel, and top of panel to ceiling line, or 8'-0" AFF where no ceiling is shown. Same manufacturer as panelboard: Not outside vendor.
F.
16160-7
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.02 STORAGE A. 3.03 Store panelboards in a cool, dry area prior to installation.
INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Install where shown on Drawings, plumb and level. Top of trim 6'-3" above finished floor for wall-mounted panelboard. Adjust operating mechanism for free mechanical movement. Conductors neatly dressed and banded with nylon cable ties after final load balancing. From each flush installation, stub three additional 3/4" conduits into nearest accessible ceiling space to provide for future utilization of spare circuits. Provide 3/4" plywood backing for all surface-mounted panelboards. Tighten all lugs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. For all fusible distribution panelboards, arrange devices in descending order such that bussed space is at top and largest devices are at bottom. Provide individual terminal or lug for each wire. Multiple wires to common terminal, or several terminals for single stranded conductor not acceptable.
B.
Identification 1. 2. Identify panelboards and directories in accordance with Section 16040. Provide nameplate similar to following example: PANEL L6 120/208 VOLT 3 4W 2" C 4 #3/0 FED FROM SWBD # 3. When required, provide identification as per NEC 210.5(C) at each branch circuit panelboard.
C.
Concrete Pad 1. 2. 3. Locate floor mounted panelboard on concrete pad. Dimensions: 4" high and extend 4" from front and sides. Provided by Division 3. Coordinate installation.
16160-8
3.04
TESTS A. Balancing Load 1. 2. Circuiting shown on Drawings is designed to produce equal loading on all phases. Under actual operating, check and make circuit adjustments as required to produce balanced condition.
3.05
16160-9
Disconnect Switches Section 16170 Page 1
Provide disconnects where shown on Drawings or required by Code.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. General Provisions Identification Motor Starters Fuses Panelboards Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16155 Section 16181 Section 16160
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. 2. 3. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Indicate on submittal exact motor or equipment served. Show all details including electrical ratings, enclosure dimensions and other pertinent data.
B.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Include installation and maintenance instructions accompanying the equipment.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01
DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Switch Interior 1. 2. 3. B. Positive off position. Lugs: NRTL-listed for aluminum and copper cable. Plated current carrying parts.
Switch Mechanism 1. 2. 3. Quick-make, quick-break operating handle and mechanism. Integral part of box. Enclosures: Code gauge sheet steel (NEMA 1) or Code gauge galvanized steel (NEMA 3R).
16170-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 4. 5. C. Treat with rust-inhibiting phosphate primer. Finish: Baked enamel.
Ratings 1. 2. 3. 4. 250 or 600 volt. Heavy duty. Horsepower rated. NRTL-listed "Suitable for Use as Service Equipment" when required.
D. Fusing 1. 2. E. 2.02 NRTL-listed rejection feature. Reject all fuses except UL-listed Class R.
Manufacturer: Panelboard manufacturer.
PLYWOOD BACKING FOR SURFACE MOUNTED SWITCHES A. 3/4" AD, fire-resistant, painted gray (including edges).
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. 3.02 Store disconnect switches in a cool, dry space prior to installation.
INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. B. Install all required disconnect switches in accordance with Code, product listing and manufacturer's recommendations. Plumb and level. Tighten lugs in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
Identification 1. Identify disconnect switches in accordance with Section 16040. Nameplate required for all disconnect switches. Nameplate to include load served, voltage, horsepower or MCA rating, and fuse size. Nameplate to be installed inside of cover on exterior disconnect switches. Example: RT-1 480 Volt, 3 35 MCA, 40 A Fuses
16170-2
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 2. 3. 4.
Do not use schedule number, but indicate load served. Pressure sensitive tape identification for disconnect switches containing fuses. Voltage markers on all disconnect switches containing system voltages in excess of 250 volts to ground.
3.03
16170-3
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. B. Provide all fuses as required.
Fuses Section 16181 Page 1
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. General Provisions Identification Cabinets Panelboards Disconnect Switches Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16133 Section 16160 Section 16170
C.
Work Furnished But Not Installed 1. 2. Provide spare fuses for all sizes and classes required. Quantity: 10%, with a minimum of three each rating, including motor starter control transformer fusing.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings 1. B. Indicate actual class, type and size of fuse installed in each device.
Record Manuals 1. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSES A. Larger than 600 amperes. 1. 2. UL-listed, Class L. Manufacturer: Bussmann Limitron KLU or "Hi-Cap" KRP-C, Ferraz Shawmut A4BY, Littelfuse KLP-C, or Brush LCL.
B.
600 Amperes and Less Protecting Motor or Combination Motor/Branch Circuit Loads. 1. 2. UL-listed, Class RK5. Manufacturer: Bussmann FRN-R/FRS-R, Ferraz Shawmut TR/TRS, Littelfuse FLNR/FLS-R, or Brush ECN-R/ECS-R.
16181-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico C. 600 Amperes and Less Protecting Feeders 1. 2.
Fuses Section 16181 Page 2
UL-listed, Class RK-1. Manufacturer: Bussmann LPN-RK/LPS-RK, Ferraz Shawmut A2D/A6D, Littelfuse LLN-RK/LLS-RK, or Brush LEN-R/LES-R.
D. Elevators 1. 2. E. UL-listed, Class J. Manufacturer: Bussmann LPJ-SP, Ferraz Shawmut AJT, or Littelfuse JTD-ID.
Motor Starter Control Transformers 1. As recommended by manufacturer.
F.
Plug Fuses 1. 2. Dual element, UL-listed Type S with adapter. Use only as indicated on Drawings for fused toggle switches.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. 3.02 Store fuses in a cool, dry space prior to installation.
INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Install fuses in accordance with Code, product listing and manufacturers recommendations. Verify equipment fuse sized for load prior to installation. All fuses shall be of same manufacturer. Do not mix fuse classes in individual applications. Fuses are not required for switchboard devices marked "Spare".
Identification 1. Indicate on inside cover with pressure sensitive tape the size, voltage and type of fuse furnished for each device. END OF SECTION
16181-2
Electric Service Section 16410 Page 1
Provide electrical service from Jemez Mountain Electric Cooperative's point of connection to main switch.
B.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. General Provisions Raceways Conductors Cabinets Panelboards Section 16010 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16133 Section 16160
C.
Description of System 1. 277/480 Volt 3 4-Wire
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 METERING A. B. C. CT metering. Utility company to furnish all instrument transformers and meters. Meter Sockets: Provide as required by utility company.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify with utility company prior to Bid all specific requirements and fees peculiar to this service installation and make allowances thereto. Include in Bid all utility company fees and charges associated with service installation. Include in Bid all miscellaneous lugs, ground rods, site and pad conduits, sleeves, and other appurtenances required for service installation and not provided by utility company.
B. C.
D. Transformer Pad 1. 2. Concrete pad provided by Division 3. Size per utility company requirements.
16410-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 3. E. Coordinate installation.
Electric Service Section 16410 Page 2
Contractor totally responsible for all utility company coordination, meter socket placement, and transformer location, with respect to service installation. Service installation shall comply with utility company rules and regulations.
F. 3.02
TESTS A. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, but prior to energization, test all service entrance conductors for ground and phase faults with "Megger" insulation tester. END OF SECTION
16410-2
Secondary Surge Arrestors Section 16421 Page 1
Provide secondary surge arrestors where specified and shown.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. Motor Starters Panelboards Section 16155 Section 16160
C.
Description of System 1. NRTL-listed Silicon oxide secondary surge arrestor arranged for 1/2" KO mounting.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SECONDARY SURGE ARRESTOR A. Construction 1. 2. 3. 4. B. C. Case dimension: 2-1/2" diameter X 4-1/2" high. 1/2" thread nipple, locknut and bushing for KO mounting. Extruded aluminum. Silicon carbide valve blocks with insulating ceramic collar.
Manufacturer: Square D SDSA series, voltage as required. Other acceptable manufacturers: Delta or Joslyn.
16421-1
Secondary Surge Arrestors Section 16421 Page 2
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. B. C. Install in accordance with Code, product listing and manufacturers recommendations. Provide one per service entrance, located in main switch. Keep interconnecting leads as short as possible. END OF SECTION
16421-2
Grounding Section 16450 Page 1
Bond and ground all electrical equipment in accordance with National Electrical Code, Wiring Standards of North Dakota, these Specifications and as shown on Drawings.
B.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. General Provisions Raceways Cable Tray Conductors Section 16010 Section 16110 Section 16114 Section 16120
C.
Description of System 1. The service equipment, conduit systems, supports, cabinets and neutral conductor shall be solidly grounded and bonded in accordance with National Electrical Code to form a permanent effective and continuous grounded system.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUND RODS A. B. C. Steel with a metallically bonded outer layer of electrolytically applied copper. Minimum 1/2" diameter 10 foot length, unless otherwise indicated. Sectional rods not permitted.
D. Manufacturer: ERITECH or equivalent. 2.02 GROUND ROD CLAMPS A. B. C. Ground rod clamps shall be high strength silicone bronze. Manufacturer: ERITECH or equivalent. At Contractors option, exothermic welding (CADWELD) or impact compression (ERITECH Hammerlock) may be used in place of ground rod clamps.
2.03
WATER PIPE GROUND CLAMPS A. B. Steel U-bolt with bronze saddle. Thomas and Betts Company 3900 series. No substitution. 16450-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. B. C. 3.02 Grounding conductors not shown or included on floor plans. When required, increase trade size of raceway accordingly. Aluminum not acceptable for use as a grounding conductor.
SYSTEM GROUNDING A. Provide grounding electrode system in accordance with NEC 250.50. If available, each of the items listed in 250.52(A)(1) through (A)(7) shall be bonded together to form grounding electrode system. Connect grounding electrode conductor to grounded service conductor. Provide raceway enclosing grounding electrode conductor. If metallic, bond as per NEC 250.64(E). Provide grounding bushing as required complete with jumpers same size as grounding electrode conductor.
B. C.
D. To comply with NEC 250.56, provide two ground rods spaced minimum 6'-0" apart. 3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR A. Non-metallic conduit: Sized in accordance with NEC, except as further modified by this Specification. Flexible Metal Conduit, Liquidtight Flexible Conduit. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Other than for connection of 120 volt recessed luminaires, not acceptable for use as means of grounding. Provide bonding jumper sized in accordance with NEC around all flexible conduits. Use fittings having lugs for termination of jumper. Spiral wrap not acceptable. Lay along surface, secured with cable ties. Bonding jumper maximum length: 6'. Bonding jumper not required where separate equipment grounding conductor is used.
B.
Branch Circuits 1. 2. 3. 4. Separate equipment grounding conductor required for each raceway. Size: per NEC 250.122. Bond to grounding bars, junction boxes and luminaires grounding screws. Field install grounding screw in luminaires if not provided by factory.
16450-2
D. Feeders 1. 2. 3. Separate grounding conductor required. Bond to grounding bars in switchboards, panelboards and motor control centers. Provide grounding bushing at both ends of all feeders utilizing metallic raceway. a. Bond to grounding bars at both ends. b. Size bonding jumpers to match equipment grounding conductor. Feeder Equipment Grounding Conductor Size: a. Size per NEC 250.122. b. Copper equivalent ampacity when aluminum phase conductors utilized. Do not splice grounding conductor.
4.
5. E.
Water Pipe System 1. Bond interior metal water piping per NEC Section 250.104(A) if water pipe system is not used as part of grounding electrode system. END OF SECTION
16450-3
Transformers Section 16460 Page 1
Provide power transformers for voltage transformation where shown on Drawings.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. General Provisions Raceways Conductors Grounding Section 16010 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16450
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Include: a. Primary and secondary voltage. b. KVA rating. c. Impedance. d. Wiring diagram. e. Quantity and percentage taps. f. Dimensions. g. Weight. h. Any other pertinent information.
B.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Include: a. Shop Drawing submittal. b. Installation and maintenance instructions furnished with transformer by manufacturer.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards 1. Construct and rate all transformers in accordance with UL Standard 506, National Electrical Codes, American National Standard Institute Specification C89.1 and National Electrical Manufacturers Association Specification ST-20.
16460-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TRANSFORMERS A. Rating 1. 2. B.
Dry type, three phase 480 Delta primary and 120/208 Wye secondary. KVA rating: Scheduled on Drawings.
Cores 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. High grade, non-aging silicon steel. Maximum magnetic flux densities substantially below saturation level. Core laminations clamped and compressed to provide quite operation. Core and coil assembly bolted to enclosure base, but isolated by means of rubber, vibration-absorbing mounts. No metal-to-metal contact between core and coil assembly and enclosures. Sound isolating systems requiring complete removal of all fastening devices not acceptable. Core electrically grounded to enclosure by means of flexible copper grounding strap.
C.
Sound Levels 1. Quiet type with design level which operates at/or below published NEMA standards. KVA 0-9 10-50 51-150 151-300 301-500 NEMA Standard Sound Level 40 45 50 55 60
D. Coils 1. 2. 3. 4. E. Aluminum conductors. Continuous wire wound construction. Impregnated with thermo-setting varnish. Final wrap of electrical insulating material to prevent mechanical injury to coil.
Primary taps 1. 2. Ratings less than 15 KVA: Two 5% FCBN taps. Ratings 15 KVA and larger: Two 2-1/2% FCAN and four 2-1/2% FCBN taps.
F.
Insulation Systems 1. Ratings less than 30 KVA: NEMA Class 185 degrees C insulation, 115 degrees C temperature rise. 16460-2
Ratings 30 KVA and greater: Class 220 degrees C insulation, 115 degrees C temperature rise. 115 degrees C temperature rise not to be obtained by use of forced air cooling or by over-ventilating coil.
G.
Enclosures 1. 2. Sheet metal, degreased, phosphatized and finished with baked outdoor enamel. Vent guard/rodent guard required on all exterior locations
H.
Wiring Compartments 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Adequately sized for compliance with NEC. Listed for 75 degree C wire. Locate at bottom of transformer. Rigidly mounted terminals to accommodate wiring lugs. Enclosure temperature rise not to exceed 35 degrees C rise above a 40 degrees C ambient. Rating 10 KVA and less: Non-ventilating enclosure. Rated above 10 KVA: Ventilated enclosure with openings designed to prevent accidental access to energized parts. Weatherproofed for exterior locations.
I.
Manufacturer 1. Manufacturer's nameplate to include: a. Manufacturer's name. b. Primary and secondary voltages. c. KVA rating. d. Serial number. e. Catalog number. f. Impedance. g. Wiring diagram. h. Degrees temperature rise. i. UL listing. Sizing and design based upon Acme equipment; Acme catalog numbers utilized for reference. Other acceptable manufacturers: Equal units by Hevi-Duty, Jefferson, or panelboard manufacturer. Contractor is cautioned to verify all physical dimensions of "equal" units prior to accepting quotation for bid.
2. 3. 4.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. Store transformer in a cool, dry space prior to installation. 16460-3
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Stub feeder conduit directly into wiring compartment. Where conduit stubs are impractical, or for suspended installations, connect to feeder by means of flexible metal conduit. Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit in damp areas. Support suspended transformers from structural members of sufficient capacity with rods and trapeze hangers. Examine area to receive transformers to ensure adequate clearance for installation. Provide fused disconnect switch adjacent to transformer when required by NEC Article 240.21(C)(5).
B.
Grounding 1. Ground transformer in accordance with NEC Article 250. Refer to NEC 250.30 for grounding separately derived systems.
C.
Identification 1. 2. Provide nameplate identification in accordance with Section 16040 for all transformers. Example: Transformer T2 480-120/208 Volts, 75 KVA Fed From Panel HP2
D. Concrete Pads 1. 2. 3. 3.03 TESTS A. Check output voltage and select correct tap to achieve the rated nominal voltage. END OF SECTION Locate floor mounted transformer on concrete pad. Dimensions: 4" high and extend minimum 4" from all sides of transformer. Provided by Division 3. Coordinate installation.
16460-4
Luminaires Section 16510 Page 1
Furnish and install a complete luminaire for each lighting outlet.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. General Provisions Raceways Conductors Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Section 16010 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16130
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010 including voltage, housing and door frame material, lens type, diffuser thickness and lamp quantity and type.
B.
Record Manuals 1. Provide information in accordance with Section 16010.
1.03
GUARANTEES A. Lamps are not included in the guarantee period but burned out lamps shall be replaced by Contractor until final acceptance by Owner.
1.04
COORDINATION A. Confirm compatibility and interface of luminaire with other materials and job conditions prior to ordering. Report discrepancies to Engineer and defer ordering until clarified. Provide frames, trim rings, and backboxes as required. Coordinate with work of other Divisions to avoid conflicts between luminaires, supports, fittings and mechanical equipment. Ceiling clearances are minimal. It is imperative that Division 15 and Division 16 Contractors coordinate conduit and duct runs to facilitate luminaire installation as shown on reflected ceiling plans. Engineer will not be responsible for interferences arising from lack of field coordination between Division 15 and Division 16 trades.
B. C.
16510-1
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES A. General 1. 2. UL NRTL or other-listed. Where shown to be installed in fire-rated assemblies, fluorescent troffers shall be listed in accordance with UL Standard 1598. Supplemental penetration protection (tenting) will be accomplished by Division 9 in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. Coordinate installation with Division 9 Contractor. Supplemental protection shall be spaced minimum 1/2" away from the luminaire, per UL Standard 1598. Verify ceiling finishes and equip all recessed luminaires with appropriate frames as required. Furnish luminaires intended for use in lay-in grid ceilings with proper clips for compliance with NEC. Refer to General Provisions, Section 16010 for "Prior Approval to Quote" procedure. Provide master/satellite wiring method where multiple three-lamp or four-lamp luminaires are shown or specified to be dual-level switched. Use one two-lamp and one four-lamp ballast for each pair of three-lamp luminaires, and two four-lamp ballasts for each pair of four-lamp luminaires. Troffers shall be post-painted stock, with regressed aluminum doors having springloaded door latches.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
B.
Lenses 1. Unless otherwise indicated, recessed troffer lenses shall be: a. Clear acrylic. b. Type 12 prismatic pattern with 3/16 square based female cones aligned 45 degrees to the length and width of the panel. c. 1/8" nominal thickness (.080" maximum penetration, 7.8 oz/square foot minimum weight). Manufacturer: KSH-12 Clear. NO SUBSTITUTION.
2. C.
Parabolic Reflectors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Provide separate plastic covering for each parabolic reflector. Provide one pair white cloth or clear plastic gloves with each louver for use when installing, lamping or performing other maintenance on reflector. Items 1 and 2 to be factory options included with luminaire. Turn gloves over to Owner at end of project with instructions on care and cleaning of reflector. Contractor responsible for all fingerprints on reflectors until project acceptance. Louver Thickness .025". Low iridescence coating for use with tri-phosphor lamps.
16510-2
D. Fluorescent Ballasts 1. 2. General: UL or other NRTL-listed, CBM certified, Class P, HPF, sound rated "A". Electronic ballasts for linear fluorescent lamps: a. Use in all luminaires except as otherwise indicated or scheduled. b. Multi-volt for use on either 120v or 277v systems. c. Instant-start with parallel lamp connections required, to allow remaining lamp(s) to maintain full illumination upon failure of companion lamp(s). d. THD: 10% or less. e. Factory-installed disconnect plug internal to the luminaire. f. Guarantee period: Minimum 60 months from date of manufacture. g. Ballast lamp quantity rating shall not exceed quantity of lamps connected. (Exception) Two-lamp rating acceptable on one-lamp connection. h. Manufacturer: Advance Transformer Company, GE Lighting, Osram Sylvania Inc., Robertson Worldwide, or Universal Lighting Technologies. Electronic ballasts for compact fluorescent lamps: a. Multi-volt for use on either 120v or 277v systems. b. Unless otherwise scheduled, manufacturer: Advance Transformer Company, GE Lighting, Osram Sylvania Inc., Robertson Worldwide, or Universal Lighting Technologies. Emergency ballasts: a. Self-testing-type with audible option. b. Factory installed. c. Manufacturer: Bodine #B50ST or #B74CST or equivalent by Lithonia with lumen output equal to Bodine. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement of all ballasts due to excessive noise, flicker, or failure during guarantee period.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Fluorescent Dimming 1. 2. 3. Factory installed. Controls and wiring as per manufacturer's recommendations. Unless otherwise scheduled, manufacturer: Lutron #FDB series
F.
HID Ballasts 1. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, high power factor, UL or other NRTL-labeled, constant wattage auto transformer. Quiet type for indoor locations.
G.
Linear Fluorescent Lamp Sockets 1. 2. 3. Lamp-lock style with four-position positive stop. Dedicated to T-8 Bi-Pin lamps. Manufacturer: Leviton #13652 or equivalent. Where socket internal shunt connection is required for proper electronic ballast/socket wiring, provide Leviton #23652 or equivalent. 16510-3
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico H. Lamps 1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6. 7.
All lamps to be of same manufacturer, unless specifically scheduled otherwise. Incandescent Lamps: a. Type as scheduled. b. Inside frosted. c. Rated 130 volts. d. Manufacturers: General Electric, Philips, or Osram Sylvania. Fluorescent Lamps: a. Type as scheduled. b. General Electric, Philips, or Osram Sylvania. Linear Fluorescent Lamps (F32T8): a. General Electric #F32T8/SP35 b. Philips #F32T8/TL735 c. Osram Sylvania #F032/735. Compact fluorescent lamps: a. Four-pin configuration. b. 3500K color temperature. c. Wattage and style as scheduled on Drawings. d. Manufacturers: Same as H4 above. HID Lamps: As scheduled (ANSI numbers utilized), General Electric, Philips, Osram Sylvania, or Venture. Spare Lamps: Provide 10% spare lamps, minimum of three each rating.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. 3.02 Store luminaires in a cool, dry space prior to installation.
INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Install luminaires plumb and true, free of light leaks, warps, dents and other irregularities. Equip any outlets not specifically labeled with a luminaire the same as those in rooms used for similar purposes. Run all lamps the same direction in rooms, corridors and other adjacent areas that contain square luminaires. Continuous row fluorescent luminaires: Hang level in straight line and butt tightly together. Verify exact location of light luminaires with reflected ceiling plan. Coordinate with Mechanical Contractor in advance of installation to prevent space conflicts. Position all supply dampers in combination air handling troffers fully open. Connect recessed luminaires to branch circuitry by means of single flexible metal conduit 6'-0" in length. 16510-4
B.
Barriers 1. 2. 3. 4. Required where recessed luminaires are installed in insulated ceilings. Suitable material to satisfy NRTL requirements. Provided by Division 16 when not indicated otherwise. Coordinate installation.
C.
Luminaire Supports 1. 2. Provide adequate supports to any structures, ceilings and grid systems to safely suspend or attach luminaires. Division 9 Contractor to provide ceiling support systems as required by that portion of the Specifications. Division 16 Contractor to provide any additional supports on an "as needed" basis to prevent ceiling from sagging or developing other irregularities. Contractor responsible for providing proper suspension and mounting devices and to safely support all luminaires shown on Drawings, regardless of ceiling systems. Rigidly support surface suspended ceiling system with anchors, hangers or clips designed for the purpose. Support surface-mounted fluorescent luminaires at four-foot intervals. Install recessed luminaires in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Rigidly support recessed luminaires to structural members or properly supported ceiling system with hangers, clips or fasteners designed for the purpose. Support pendant and stem-hung luminaires at four-foot intervals.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 3.03 TESTS A.
Upon completion of this portion of the Work and prior to its acceptance by Owner, check for proper alignment and operation of all lighting equipment.
3.04
CLEAN UP A. Clean all luminaires immediately prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION
16510-5
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Involved 1.
Lightning Protection System Section 16601 Page 1
Provide all labor and materials required for a complete, functional, and unobtrusive lightning protection system.
B.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. Raceways Secondary Surge Arrestors Grounding Section 16110 Section 16421 Section 16450
1.02
CODES AND STANDARDS A. Lightning Protection Institute Installation Code LPI-175 (UL Master Label Program required). NFPA 780. UL 96A.
B. C.
D. OSHA. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of UL and LPI-listed lightning protection systems. Manufacturer's latest approved design. UL-listed.
B. C. 1.04
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Include type, size, and locations of all equipment grounds, cable routings, and other equipment.
B.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Include installation and maintenance instructions accompanying equipment.
16601-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER A.
The system specified is based on equipment as manufactured by Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. All reference to model numbers and other pertinent information is intended to establish the standards of operational concepts, performance, quality and appearance, which must be met. All equipment shall be UL-listed, and shall be furnished by the same manufacturer to ensure equipment compatibility and listing requirements Acceptable manufacturer/suppliers: 1. 2. 3. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 124 East Second St., Maryville, Missouri, (800) 426-3792. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc., 901 Sibley Highway, St. Paul, Minnesota, (800) 777-1230. Manufacturers/suppliers not listed above and wishing to quote shall refer to Specification 16010-1.04 for approval procedure. No consideration shall be given to any manufacturer/supplier not pre-approved. Interested manufacturer/supplier shall: a. Be a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of UL and LPI listed lightning protection systems with a minimum of ten years experience. b. Clearly indicate proposed material data and installation drawings for this particular project. c. Include type, size, and locations of all equipment grounds, cable routings, and other equipment.
B.
C.
2.02
MATERIALS A. General 1. All materials shall be copper or copper alloy, and of the size, weight, and construction for use on steel framed buildings in accordance with LPI and NFPA Code requirements for Class I structures and as per manufacturer recommendations. All miscellaneous bolts, nuts and screws shall be brass, bronze, or stainless steel. Connections to structural steel shall be made with bonding plates of cast-bronze with bolt tension cable clamps, Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. No. 639, 701X, 702, etc. Equipment on stacks and chimneys shall be protected from corrosion in accordance with LPI and NFPA requirements.
2. 3.
4.
B.
Main Conductors: Copper, 29-strands 17-gauge minimum, Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. No. 29X.
16601-2
C.
Air Terminals 1. 2. 3. Solid, round copper bar 1/2" minimum diameter. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. No. 55, 56. Project minimum 10above object to be protected. Center roof area terminals shall be safety spring type. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. No. 572SPBT.
D. Air Terminal Bases 1. 2. 3. 4. Cast-bronze with bolt pressure cable connections. Securely mounted with stainless steel screws or bolts. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. No. 690X, 678, etc., as required. Bases on built-up tar and gravel roofs shall be secured with a proper adhesive and shall have a minimum surface contact area of 18.5 sq. inches, Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. No. 688. Crimp-type connectors at bases are not acceptable.
5. E.
Ground Rods 1. 2. Minimum 5/8" in diameter and 10'.0" long. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. No. TL5810. Connect to system with a two-bolt cast-bronze clamp, No. 231 having a minimum length of 1-1/2" and employing stainless steel cap screws.
F.
Cable Fasteners 1. 2. 3. Electrolytically compatible with conductor and mounting surface. Spaced according to LPI and NFPA Code requirements. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. No. 166, 730, or 186X, etc.
G.
Bonding Devices, Cable Splicers, and Miscellaneous Connectors 1. 2. 3. 4. Cast-bronze with bolt pressure connections to cable. Cast or stamped crimp-fittings are not acceptable. Splicers similar to Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. No. 423B, 705, 706, etc. Bonding devices similar to Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. No. 702, 704, 142, 581, 142X, etc.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. UL Master Label Program applicable.
16601-3
3. 4. 5.
The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installer who is a Certified Master Installer of the LPI or working under the direct supervision of an LPI manufacturer as listed above, or his authorized LPI Certified Master installer representative. All equipment shall be installed in a neat workman-like manner in the most inconspicuous manner possible. The number, size, type and location of grounds and connections to steel at roof and grade level shall be as required by NFPA and LPI Codes. Copper equipment shall not be connected to aluminum surfaces, except by means of an LPI approved bi-metal transition fitting. Lead coating is not to be accepted as a bi-metal transition.
B.
Roof-Mounted Equipment 1. 2. 3. A complete cable system with related air terminals, splices, and bonds, etc. shall be used on the roof. Downlead cables to steel frame from the cable roof system shall not be brought directly through the roof. Thru-roof connectors with solid rods or conduit through pitch pockets shall be used for this purpose.
C.
Down Conductors 1. 2. Refer to details on Drawings. Full-conductor downleads enclosed in 1" Schedule 40 PVC conduit.
3.02
COORDINATION A. B. Work with other trades to ensure a correct, neat and unobtrusive installation. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to ensure a sound bond to the main water service and to ensure interconnection with other building ground systems, including both telephone and electrical. Secondary surge arrestor at electrical service by Section 16421.
C.
D. Secondary surge arrestor at telephone service by Owner's telephone supplier.
16601-4
3.03
COMPLETION A. The lightning protection installer shall secure and deliver the LPI System Certification and UL Master Label to the Engineer for the Owner upon completion of the installation. The manufacturer/supplier shall also submit copies of As-Built Shop Drawings with the LPI Form LPI-1-R91 as part of each record manual to finalize the LPI Certified System Application. END OF SECTION
B.
16601-5
Fire Alarm and Detection Section 16721 Page 1
Furnish and install a complete addressable fire alarm and detection system in accordance with NFPA 72, NFPA 5000, and this specification.
B.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. General Provisions Identification Raceways Conductors Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Fire Protection Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16130 Section 15500
C.
Work not included 1. Where required, the Owner shall be responsible for: a. Line lease or service fees associated with signal transmission (alarm, supervisory, and trouble) to a local city connection or a remote central station. b. Any proprietary interface equipment not specified herein and required by the Owners monitoring service.
D. Description of System 1. General: Provide a complete, non-coded, addressable, microprocessor-based fire alarm system with initiating devices, notification appliances, and monitoring and control devices as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Software: The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing instructions and operating sequences as necessary. The system shall be capable of on site programming to accommodate system expansion and facilitate changes in operation. All software shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control panel (FACP). Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instruction stored in memory. History Logs: The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. Separate alarm, supervisory and trouble logs shall be provided. Wiring/Signal Transmission a. Transmission shall be addressable signal transmission, dedicated to fire alarm service only. b. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at the fire alarm control panel. Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation.
2.
3.
4.
16721-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico c. 5.
6.
7.
System connections for initiating, signaling line circuits and notification appliance circuits shall be Class A or Class B as described in Part 3 of this specification. Analog Smoke Detectors a. Monitoring: The FACP shall individually monitor detectors for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and shall individually adjust for sensitivity. The FACP shall determine the condition of each detector by comparing the detector value to the stored values. b. Environmental Compensation: The FACP shall maintain a moving average of the detectors smoke chamber value to automatically compensate for dust, dirt, and other conditions that could affect detection operations. c. Programmable Sensitivity: Smoke detectors shall have multiple sensitivity levels, programmed and monitored from the FACP. d. The FACP shall automatically indicate when an individual detector needs cleaning. e. The FACP shall continuously perform an automatic self-test on each detector, which will check detector electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted. Any detector that fails this test shall indicate a trouble condition. Analog Heat Detectors a. Monitoring: The FACP shall individually monitor detectors for alarm condition and shall individually adjust for fixed temperature sensing and rate-of-rise sensing. The FACP shall determine the condition of each detector by comparing the detector value to the stored values. b. Programmable Sensitivity: Heat detectors shall have rate-of-rise temperature detection values selectable at the FACP for either 15 F or 20 F per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall operate at either 135 F or 155 F. c. The FACP shall continuously perform an automatic self-test on each detector, which will check detector electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted. Any detector that fails this test shall indicate a trouble condition. Power Requirements a. The FACP and each required expansion panel shall receive 120-volt AC power via a dedicated 20-ampere circuit breaker from the nearest panelboard. The incoming power to the each panel shall be supervised so that any power failure will be indicated at the FACP and sound a trouble signal. b. The FACP shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 15 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to battery standby upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. System batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be indicated at the control panel. c. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24-volt DC and shall be individually fused at the control panel. d. The system shall support 100% of the addressable devices in alarm operation at the same time, under both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions.
16721-2
Fire Sprinkler Monitoring a. Water Flow: Activation of a water flow switch shall initiate a general alarm operation. b. Valve Supervisory Switch (Tamper Switch): The activation of any valve supervisory switch shall activate system supervisory operations. c. Activation of either a water flow switch or valve supervisory switch shall distinctly report which device is in alarm at the FACP and any required remote annunciator(s).
1.02
REQUIRED SYSTEM FUNCTIONS A. Priority of Signals: Alarm events have the highest priority. Subsequent alarm events are queued in the order received and do not affect existing alarm conditions. Supervisory and Trouble events have second-level and third-level priority respectively. Events of a higherlevel priority take precedence over events of lower priority even though the lower-priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all events regardless of priority or order received. Non-interfering: The activation of an addressable device does not prevent receipt of signals from subsequent activations. Transmission to Remote Central Station: The FACP shall have the capability to automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a central station through a digital alarm communicator or reverse polarity module as required by Owners monitoring service requirements.
B.
C.
D. Types of Signaling: The FACP shall be UL-listed for the applicable types of signaling methods used, i.e. Temporal Coded, Non-Coded, March Time and/or Digital Alarm Communicator (DACT) Signaling. E. Annunciation: Operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated at the FACP and any required remote annunciator(s), indicating the location and type of device. General Alarm: Activation of an alarm initiating device shall include: 1. 2. 3. Indication of alarm condition at the FACP and any required remote annunciator(s). Identification of the device that is the source of the alarm at the FACP and any required remote annunciator(s). Operation of all audible and visual notification appliances throughout the building until silenced at the FACP and any required remote annunciator(s). Audible alarm notification shall operate steady or match existing building convention. Shutting down designated air handling equipment, and activating smoke dampers and exhaust fans as required by alarm input. Have the capability to automatically route the signal to a Remote Central Station. The control panel shall be capable of bypassing Items 4 and 5 through the use of programmable touch pads on the front of the control panel. These touch pads shall be password-protected to prevent unauthorized tampering. Record the event in the FACP historical log. 16721-3
F.
4. 5. 6.
7.
Closing doors normally held open by magnetic door holders. Initiate elevator recall in accordance with ASME/ANSI A17.1, when designated fire alarm detectors are activated. 10. Initiation of smoke control sequence. 11. Unlocking of designated doors. 12. Fire department shall be automatically notified in accordance with NFPA 500024.3.4.7. G. Supervisory Operations: Upon activation of a supervisory device such as fire pump failure, low air pressure switch, and tamper switch, the system shall operate as follows: 1. 2. Activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the FACP and any required remote annunciator(s). Pressing the Supervisory Acknowledge key will silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the supervisory LED on indicating off-normal condition. Alarm acknowledgement, investigation and automatic notification sequences shall comply with NFPA 72, 6.8.1.3, Positive Alarm Sequence. Record the event in the FACP historical log. Transmission of supervisory signal to Remote Central Station.
3. 4. H.
Alarm Silencing: If the Alarm Silence button is pressed, all audible alarm signals shall cease. (Visual signals shall continue to operate.) System Reset: 1. The System Reset button shall be used to return the system to its normal state. Display messages shall provide the operator assurance of the sequential steps (IN PROGRESS, RESET COMPLETED) as they occur. The system shall verify all circuits or devices are restored prior to resetting the system to avoid the potential for realarming the system. The display message shall indicate, ALARM PRESENT, SYSTEM RESET ABORTED. Should an alarm condition continue, the system will remain in an alarmed state.
I.
2. J. K.
Drill: A manual activation (drill) switch shall be provided to initiate an alarm on the FACP. Manual Control: Manual controls shall be supervised so that an off normal position of any switch shall cause an off normal system trouble. The off normal status shall be clearly identified in plain language on the FACP alphanumeric display. 1. 2. Manual Bypass Control: The ability to perform a manual bypass of selected automatic functions shall be provided. Circuit Enable/Disable Control: The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling each circuit individually for maintenance or testing purposes.
L.
WalkTest: The system shall be capable of being tested by one person without returning to the control panel to reset the system after each alarm. Enabling the one-person test feature at the FACP shall activate the One person Testing mode of the system as follows: 16721-4
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
The control panel shall automatically log each alarm and each trouble condition tested, and reset the system for the next condition to be received. Should the Walktest feature be left off for a preprogrammed length of time without any activity, the system shall revert to the normal operating mode automatically. The city circuit connection and suppression release circuits shall be bypassed for the testing group. Control relay functions associated to the testing group shall be bypassed. The FACP shall indicate a trouble condition. The alarm activation of any initiating device in the testing group shall cause the audible notification appliances to sound a code to identify the device. The control panel shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete. Any momentary opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause the audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating the trouble condition.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Indicate: a. Mounting details. b. Cabinet dimensions. c. Wiring diagrams. d. Description of devices. e. Floor plan layout of fire alarm system indicating location of devices, wiring between devices, and intensities of audible and visual appliances (25 IAM, Topic 26.6A). Upon request, the Engineer will furnish AutoCAD files of the floor plan. Submit one copy to Engineer for approval, and three (3) copies through the Contracting Officer to Division of Safety and Risk Management (AHJ) for review and approval prior to installation. Refer to Section 013300-7, 2.1.C.5. Upon receipt of Engineers approval, provide additional four copies. Submit one copy to Engineer. Remaining copies for Contractor use at the project site and for Record Drawing/Manual submittal at project closeout (redlined to indicate actual conditions of installation).
B.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Provide information in accordance with Section 16010. Include complete data for operation and maintenance of the system, consisting of: a. Wiring diagrams. b. Testing. c. Maintenance. d. Description of system operation. e. Addition of devices. f. Frequency of testing procedures. g. All data referenced in NFPA 72, 10.6.
16721-5
Provide multiple copies (including shop drawing connection/riser diagram), one to remain in control panel, other copies for Record Manuals.
1.04
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER A. The system specified is based on equipment as manufactured by SimplexGrinnell. All reference to model numbers and other pertinent information is intended to establish the standards of operational concepts, performance, quality and appearance, which must be met. Acceptable manufacturers: System shall match existing school and dormitory fire alarm systems. All equipment shall be NRTL-listed, and shall be furnished by one manufacturer to ensure listing/equipment compatibility as required by NFPA 72.
B.
C.
D. Supplier providing equipment and services under this Section shall have: 1. A factory-authorized service center located in North Dakota within 250 miles of the project site. Referenced service center shall be under direct control of the Supplier, staffed by employees of the Supplier, and contain an inventory of replacement material requisite for timely maintenance. Referenced service center shall be operational for a minimum five-year period prior to bid opening. A minimum of one employee at the above referenced service center certified by National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). Certification shall be in the Fire Protection Engineering Technology field, Fire Alarm Systems subfield, and shall be minimum Level III.
2.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 CENTRAL SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) 1. 2. General: Comply with UL 864, Control Panels for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems. Cabinet: a. Steel enclosure with lockable, hinged door for front access. Surface or flush-mount style as indicated on the Drawings. b. Color: Red when surface-mounted in equipment rooms, and beige, black or gray when flush-mounted in other locations. The following FACP hardware shall be provided: a. Power limited base panel with 120-volt AC input power. b. Addressable point capacity: Size for requirements of Drawings and Specifications, minimum of 250 points expandable to 2,000 points, inclusive of inputs and outputs in any combination (SimplexGrinnell #4100U series). c. Appropriate initiating device circuit (IDC) and notification appliance circuit (NAC) modules to support Class A or Class B circuits as described in Part 3 of this specification 16721-6
3.
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico d.
e. f.
g. h.
i. j.
Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: FACP shall include an 80 character LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and shall include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands. Notification appliance circuits: Size for requirements of Drawings and Specifications, minimum of 4 required. Two form C auxiliary output circuits (rated 2A @ 24-volt DC, resistive), operation is programmable for trouble, alarm, supervisory or other selective control operations. Provide capability for switching up to 1/2 A @ 120-volt AC, inductive loads. Secondary (emergency) power supply including: battery(s), charger and automatic transfer switch. Battery(s) shall be sealed lead-acid type. A digital alarm communicator or reverse polarity module as required by Owners monitoring service requirements to automatically route the alarm signals to a Remote Central Station. 1) Digital Alarm Communicator a) Designed to monitor the status of the FACP and report to a Remote Central Station as follows: i) Alarms. ii) Troubles. iii) Supervisory conditions. b) Dual telephone line interface. Supervised serial communication circuit for control and monitoring of remotely located LCD annunciator(s) and I/O panels. Exit Sign/Fire Alarm Flasher Module: 1) Included with exit signage system. See Section 16510. 2) Assume maximum 50-milliampere current draw per module, at 24 volt DC. 3) When shown or scheduled on the Drawings, provide unsupervised 24 Volt DC circuit, powered on alarm, and included with standby battery system integral to the fire alarm control panel. De-energize upon alarm silence or reset.
B.
Expansion Panels 1. NAC Addressable Controller a. Stand-alone panel providing power and communications interface for addressable notification appliances with: 1) Three isolated output channels for addressable notification appliance control. 2) Channels that are Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs), each rated at 2-1/2 A and for up to 63 addressable notification appliances (up to 189 per controller). 3) Individual supervision of each appliance allowing Class B wiring to be branch connected and T tapped. 4) Comply with UL 864. b. Input power: 120-volt AC. NAC Extender a. Stand-alone panel capable of: 1) Powering a minimum of four non-addressable notification appliance circuits. Each circuit rated 2 A @ 24-volt DC.
2.
16721-7
b. c.
d.
e. C.
2) Controlling non-addressable notification appliances. Internal power supply and battery charger capable of charging internal-mounted batteries or batteries mounted in an external cabinet where required. Connected to the FACP via addressable communications circuit. Via the communications circuit each output notification appliance circuit can be individually controlled for general alarm or selective area notification. Alarms from the FACP shall signal the NAC extender panel to activate. The panel shall monitor itself and each of its NACs for trouble conditions and shall report trouble conditions to the FACP. Input power: 120-volt AC.
Alarm Initiating Devices 1. Manual fire alarm station: a. Address capable b. Non-coded single action. c. Provide two spare stations. Automatic area smoke detection station: a. Address capable. b. Photoelectric plug-in head unit which mounts to a twist-lock base. c. Individual station sensitivity levels are selected and monitored at the control panel. d. Self-restoring. e. Provide three spare stations. Stand-alone unit detection station: a. Photoelectric. b. Integral 135 degree fixed temperature thermal device. c. Integral 90 db solid state piezo horn. d. 120-Volt operation with 9-Volt battery back-up (battery door shall have locking cover). e. Integral Form A/C contacts to be used for remote annunciation. f. Manufacturer: Gentex #9120TF series, except in handicapped accessible units provide Gentex #7109CS series. g. In isolation sleeping rooms and isolation restrooms, the Gentex #7109CS series smoke alarms shall be wired together for simultaneous operation. h. Provide three spare stand-alone detection stations of each type. Automatic duct smoke detection station: a. Address capable. b. Same as automatic area smoke detection station, except with associated duct housing and sampling tubes as required. c. Refer to Motor and Equipment Schedule for equipment requiring duct detection. Automatic area heat detection station: a. Address capable. b. Combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature rate compensated sensing plug-in head unit, which mounts to a twist-lock base.
2.
3.
4.
5.
16721-8
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico c.
d. e. f. g. h.
Individual station rate-of-rise temperature levels are selected and monitored at the control panel. Fixed temperature level is independent of rate-of-rise levels and shall operate at 135 F or 155 F. Select appropriate mode. Locations requiring temperature ratings exceeding 155 F may include hardwired detector on an addressable base. Self-restoring. Low profile. White. Provide two spare stations of each rating.
D. Alarm Notification Appliances (Addressable) 1. Each notification appliance shall contain an electronic module and a selectable address setting to allow it to occupy a unique location on the circuit. This on-board module shall also allow the circuit to perform appliance diagnostics that assist with installation and subsequent test operations. A visible LED on each appliance shall provide verification of communications. The controlling signaling line circuit digitally communicates with each appliance and receives a response to verify the appliance's presence on the circuit. The circuit provides a digital command to control appliance operation. Audible alarm notification appliance: a. Electronic horn type appliance with a High/Lo Setting, programmable by appliance from the FACP or by channel from the addressable controller. b. Flush mount. c. Red finish. d. Comply with UL 464. Visual alarm notification appliance: a. Xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. b. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act and Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines (36 CFR, Part 1191: ADAABAAG). In handicapped sleeping rooms and in isolation rooms, comply with NFPA 72-7.5.4.6 strobe intensity and mounting. In other locations, strobes to be placed not less than 80 and not more than 96 above finished floor, or within 6 below ceiling if low ceiling heights do not permit mounting at 80 minimum height (NFPA 72, 7.5.4.2). Provide Candela intensities as dictated by location and NFPA 72, 7.5. c. "Fire" lettering on housing or lens. d. Comply with UL 1971. e. Adjustable intensity selector integral to appliance. Where shown ganged together on Plans, combine audible and visual alarm notification appliances into one red device. Manufacturer: Same as control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5. 6. E.
Auxiliary Devices 1. Magnetic door holder: a. 24 volt or match existing.
16721-9
2.
3.
b. Extra low profile for use with concealed wiring. Individual addressable module (IAM): a. Module provides supervised, location specific addressability, to a single initiating device by monitoring normally open, dry contacts. Closure of contacts initiates an alarm or trouble signal as required by the device being monitored. b. Used to provide addressable monitoring of devices such as flow or tamper switches, etc. c. Powered directly from signaling line circuit. No separate power source required. d. Mount in single-gang box, minimum 2-1/2 deep. e. Included with flush or surface cover as required. f. Provide a separate IAM for each device being monitored. Individual addressable relay module (Relay IAM): a. Module provides control and status tracking of a Form C SPDT, dry contact. b. Module power and communications provided directly from the signaling line circuit. c. Used to provide addressable control functions such as elevator recall, HVAC control, fan control, damper control, etc. d. Mount in standard 4 square box. e. Included with flush or surface cover as required.
F.
Manual Shutdown 1. Manual shutdown capability included with motor starter.
G.
Automatic Shutdown 1. 2. 3. 4. Automatic shutdown capability for air handling equipment where required by NFPA 90A. Locate fan shutdown relays remote from fire alarm control panel, controlled by integral relay in fire alarm control panel, with bypass switch. Refer to Motor and Equipment Schedule for equipment requiring automatic shutdown. Wiring: Two-wire parallel independent circuit to fire alarm control panel.
H.
Remote Annunciator 1. 2. Alphanumeric LCD display with the same look and feel as the FACP operator interface. Status LEDs provide system status in addition to LCD display information. Status LEDs included for: a. Alarm. b. System trouble c. System supervisory. d. Alarm silenced. e. Power on. Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED shall flash. The unit audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steady for trouble and supervisory conditions. When acknowledged, the LED shall remain on until reset. 16721-10
3.
5.
Captive key switch enables following push buttons: a. Alarm acknowledge. b. Trouble acknowledge. c. Alarm silence. d. System reset. e. Supervisory acknowledge. Supervisor remote annunciator stations shall have manual means to initiate general alarms.
I.
Fire Sprinkler System Equipment 1. 2. Flow switch(es) and valve supervisory switches furnished and installed by Division 15 Fire Sprinkler Contractor, wired by Division 16 Contractor. Fire sprinkler alarm notification appliance (bell or audible-visual signaling unit) furnished by Division 15 Fire Sprinkler Contractor, installed and wired by Division 16 Contractor.
J.
Elevator Fire Sprinkler/Power Module Switch 1. Interface with the elevator fire sprinkler/power module switch such that activation of the elevator and /or elevator equipment room fire sprinkler flow switch(es) shall disconnect the elevator power circuit via the power module shunt trip operator. Interface with fire alarm voltage monitoring relay furnished with power module switch to comply with NFPA 72. Provide fire alarm IAM(s) as required by elevator power module switch characteristics. Refer to Elevator Fire Sprinkler/Power Module Switch Interface Detail on the Drawings.
2. 3. 4.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. 3.02 Store fire alarm components in a cool, dry area prior to installation.
INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. Install in accordance with code, product listing, and manufacturers recommendations. Wiring to comply with all national, state and local fire codes. Conductors: a. Quantity as required by manufacturer.
16721-11
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico b.
Signaling Line Circuits (SLC): 1) Two-conductor #18 AWG, twisted pair shielded cable. Plenum rated where required. 2) NFPA 72 Class A (Style 6), T tapping not permitted (exceptions as per NFPA 72, 6.4.2.2.2 acceptable). 3) Two-conductor #18 AWG, twisted pair shielded cable. 4) NFPA 72 Class A, (Style Z), T tapping not permitted (exceptions as per NFPA 72, 6.4.2.2.2 acceptable). 5) Audible appliances (horns) controlled separately from visual appliances. 6) All visual appliances shall flash in synchronization. c. Miscellaneous Circuits: (such as magnetic door holders & etc.) 1) Solid, #14 AWG minimum, size for maximum 5% voltage drop. d. Color Coding: Manufacturer/Supplier requirements. e. Enclosed in raceway system (i.e. conduit). f. To ensure proper supervision of initiating and indicating circuitry, three wires maximum per wire-nut. 4. Raceway Systems: a. Size raceway systems and junction boxes as per NEC. b. All junction boxes, junction box covers and raceway systems except those embedded directly in earth or concrete, or surface metal raceway systems (wiremold), shall be externally identified by permanent bright red paint suitable for the purpose, to easily distinguish from other communication or power raceway systems. Items shall be painted prior to installation. In addition to field painted conduit, factory painted conduit as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit (Fire AlarmTM EMT), acceptable. c. Route outgoing and return Class A circuits in separate conduits (exceptions as per NFPA 72, 6.4.2.2.2 acceptable). d. Multiple circuits acceptable in same raceway system. 5. Terminations: a. Connect all devices according to manufacturer's data. b. Made on terminal strips with separate joint for each conductor. c. Number identify all strips as shown in wiring diagram included with manual. d. Number identify all conductors to agree with terminal strip numbering. e. When required, end of line devices to be mounted on terminal strips in the FACP. f. Wire-nut terminating not acceptable. 6. Do not zone alarm notification appliances. Rather, route notification appliance circuits (NACs) with signaling line circuits (SLCs). Terminate and jumper as required to maintain supervision on identified terminal strips. 7. Locate devices as generally shown on Drawings and as specifically indicated on installation instructions. 8. Remote fan shut-down relays to be mounted near controller or equipment. 9. Where control panel is shown to be surface-mounted, provide 3/4" grade AD, fireresistant, gray painted (including edges), plywood backing. 10. Provide 1/2" conduit from fire alarm control panel to nearest telephone terminal board, with four-pair minimum Category 3 UTP voice cable terminated on digital alarm communicator or reverse polarity module.
16721-12
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 11. Provide elevator/fire alarm interface as per Section 16622. B. Smoke Detectors 1. 2.
Locate as generally shown on Drawings and as specifically indicated in NFPA 72 and on installation instructions. Provide protective plastic wrapping to prevent entrance of construction dust. Fieldinstall during construction. Remove immediately prior to supplier testing. Replace protective plastic wrapping and remove day of final inspection.
C.
Duct Detectors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Installed and arranged to automatically initiate general alarm. Provide at a suitable location in the return air stream prior to exhausting from building or being diluted by outside air. Provide at a suitable location in main supply duct on downstream side of filters. Refer to Motor and Equipment Schedule for equipment requiring duct detection. Locate as specifically indicated in NFPA 72 and on installation instructions. Coordinate with supplier's representative prior to installation, exact location to ensure accurate sampling of air stream. Provide quantity as required by duct geometry. Do not install head on sampling tube base in housing until final supplier testing, unless a protective cover is included with the detector head.
6.
D. Remote Annunciator 1. 2. 3. Flush mounting. Gangable switch box as required. Minimum two #14 AWG conductors and one #18 AWG twisted shielded pair, or as required by manufacturer.
E.
Fire Sprinkler System Equipment 1. 2. See Mechanical Drawings and Specifications for locations and quantities. Valve supervisory switches: a. Integral contact shall serve as supervisory initiating device for separate Address. b. Supervisory only. Will not sound general alarm, or "Trouble". Flow Switch: a. Consists of two Form C (NO-NC) contacts. b. One contact shall serve as alarm initiating device for separate address. c. Second contact shall control fire sprinkler alarm notification appliance. Connect to nearest 120 volt egress circuit. Provide transformer and relay as required.
3.
16721-13
3.03
TESTS A. Prior to final inspection, verify that the fire alarm system is in proper working condition, free from false alarms. Furnish a letter of verification to Engineer indicating that the system has been tested by manufacturer's representative and is found to be complete and functional. Provide record of completion in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 4. List date of test and name of manufacturer's representative. Indicate in letter that testing was in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 10, including re-acceptance testing when applicable. Include copies in control panel and Record Manuals. Notify Owner, Engineer, and Local Fire Marshall or Fire Chief one week in advance of scheduled tests. Division 16 Contractor responsible for test coordination and scheduling.
B.
3.04
INSTRUCTIONS A. Manufacturer's representative shall instruct Owner in proper operation, maintenance and testing of complete fire alarm and detection system. Indicate on letter of verification, name of Owner's representative receiving instructions. Videotape instructions and include with Record Manuals in accordance with Section 16010.
B. 3.05
16721-14
Clock and Program System Section 16730 Page 1
Provide complete and operational Clock and Program System.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. General Provisions Identification Raceways Cable Tray Intercommunication and Program System Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16110 Section 16114 Section 16760
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. 2. B. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Show all details, including back box dimensions, speaker size and performance, etc.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Include information for operating and maintaining the system, including wiring diagrams, repair parts list, proper setting of controls, and all instructions accompanying equipment. Provide multiple copies, one to remain in master clock control panel, other copies for Record Manuals.
3.
1.03
DESCRIPTION A. The clock and program system shall include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Classroom call-in switches. Corrected classroom stand-alone digital clocks. Classroom speakers/baffles. Cable. All associated material, hardware and wiring necessary for complete operational system.
16730-1
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MASTER TIME PROGRAMMING SYSTEM A. Equipment 1. 2. 3. 4. Master clock: Provided under Section 16760. Classroom clock unit: DuKane 24F750. Classroom clock power supply: DuKane 17A461/170462. Classroom speaker/baffle: Lowell Model OM8-P with matching back box and DuKane Model 5A606 speaker/transformer combination.
B.
Cable 1. Remote Clock Cable: Two (2) runs of #14THHN and one (1) run Belden 8760 or equivalent, in conduit.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. 3.02 Store all Clock and Program System components in a cool, dry space prior to installation.
INSTALLATION A. General 1. 2. 3. Install in accordance with Code, product listing and manufacturers recommendations. All wiring installed in minimum 1/2" raceway as shown on Drawings, color-coded black "run", white "neutral", and red "correction". Install all components in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03
TESTING A. Prior to final inspection, verify that the clock and program system is in proper working condition. Furnish letter of verification to Engineer indicating that the system has been tested by a manufacturer's representative. List date of test and name of manufacturer's representative. Contractor responsible for test coordination and scheduling.
3.04
INSTRUCTIONS A. Manufacturer's representative to instruct Owner in proper operation, maintenance and testing of the complete program system. Include name of Owner's representative in letter of verification. Videotape instructions and include with Record Manuals in accordance with Section 16010.
B.
16730-2
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 3.05 CLEANING A. B.
Clean and vacuum interior to remove all wire and insulation scraps, dust and dirt. Clean all exposed surfaces immediately prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION
16730-3
Telephone Service Section 16740 Page 1
Provide telephone service raceway system as shown and required.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. General Provisions Raceways Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Wiring and Device Plates Grounding Voice/Data Rough-in Voice/Data Cabling Section 16010 Section 16110 Section 16130 Section 16140 Section 16450 Section 16741 Section 16742
C.
Work furnished and installed by others. 1. Local serving telephone utility shall place the service entrance cable to the point of presence, install circuit protection cabinet, protectors, and ground the entrance cable as needed to the service grounding conductor provided under this Contract.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Main telephone terminal boards (TTB): 3/4 grade AD fire-resistant plywood, painted gray (including edges). Dimensions as required by serving utility company.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Raceways: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Provide telephone service entrance conduit, stubbed to terminal board from property line. Verify service entrance conduit size and property line location with serving utility. Provide bushing or connector at each conduit stub. Provide pull wire in each telephone conduit run.
Provide surface double-duplex receptacle at main telephone terminal board, fed from dedicated spare circuit breaker. Receptacles to be isolated ground type, with separate grounding conductor connected to panelboard grounding bar.
16740-1
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico C.
Telephone Service Section 16740 Page 2
Provide telephone board communication grounding bus as required by serving utility, minimum #6 solid SDBC in PVC conduit, extended shortest and most direct route to ground bar at main switch. Terminate in ground bar affixed to telephone terminal board, location as directed by serving utility.
D. Entire installation to comply with serving utility company requirements. END OF SECTION
16740-2
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. B. Provide voice/data raceway system as shown on the Drawings.
Voice/Data Rough-in Section 16741 Page 1
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. General Provisions Raceways Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Grounding Telephone Service Voice and Data Cabling Section 16010 Section 16110 Section 16130 Section 16450 Section 16740 Section 16742
C.
Work furnished and installed by others. 1. Owners voice/data supplier shall provide all end-user software, programming, computer servers, terminals and personal computers.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Raceways: 1. B. As specified in Section 16110 and sized as shown on Drawings, minimum 3/4.
Boxes: 1. As specified in Section 16130 and 16132.
C.
Blank plates: 1. As specified in Section 16140, yoke-mounted. Box-mounted plates not acceptable.
D. Voice/data terminal board (TB): 1. 3/4 grade AD fire-resistant plywood, painted gray (including edges). Dimensions as required by Owners voice/data supplier. May be included with main telephone terminal board for single board installation.
16741-1
Voice/Data Rough-in Section 16741 Page 2
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Raceways: 1. 2. 3. 4. Stub from rough-in location into nearest accessible ceiling space, or location as indicated on Drawings. Provide bushing or connector at each conduit stub. Provide pull wire in each voice/data raceway. Provide raceway system where concealed in walls, in mechanical rooms and rooms without accessible ceilings.
B.
Provide surface double-duplex receptacle at voice/data terminal board, fed from dedicated spare circuit breaker. Receptacles to be isolated ground type, with separate grounding conductor connected to panelboard grounding bar. Provide blank plates for all rough-in boxes not concealed by Owners voice/data equipment.
C.
D. Entire installation to comply with Owners voice/data supplier requirements. END OF SECTION
16741-2
Voice and Data Cabling Section 16742 Page 1
Furnish and install a complete voice and data cabling system as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
B.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. General Provisions Identification Cable Tray Wiring and Device Plates Telephone Service Voice/Data Rough-in Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16114 Section 16140 Section 16740 Section 16741
C.
Work furnished and installed by others 1. 2. Voice: The Owner will provide all telephone handsets. Data: The Owner will provide all end-user software, programming, computer servers, terminals and personal computers.
D. Description of System 1. Voice: Work shall include, but not be limited to, devices, faceplates, cables and cable assemblies, punch-down blocks, cable management, terminations, and final acceptance testing. Data: Work shall include, but not be limited to, devices, faceplates, cables and cable assemblies, cable management, patch panels, data racks, terminations, and testing.
2.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Indicate: a. Mounting details. b. Connection diagrams. c. Description of devices. d. Name of installation Contractor/Subcontractor.
B.
16742-1
Include manufacturers data for adjustment, operation and maintenance of equipment and name of service organization.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER A. The system specified is based on equipment as manufactured by General Cable, Panduit and other manufacturers as listed. All reference to model numbers and other pertinent information is intended to establish the standards of operational concepts, performance, quality and appearance which must be met. Backboards, conduit, cable tray, and rough-ins shall be by Electrical Contractor. Contractors/Subcontractors performing Section 16742 work, shall have personnel trained/certified in communications cabling installation via equipment manufacturers or industry standards training programs. Acceptable installers/suppliers 1. 2. 3. 4. Consolidated Communications Corporation, 507 South Main, Dickinson, ND (701) 483-4000. Dell-Comm, Inc., 812 South 18th Street, Bismarck, ND (701) 222-2887. Executone by Davron Biz Solutions, 408 East Main, Mandan, ND (701) 663-7471. Installers not listed above and wishing to quote shall refer to Specification 16010-1.04 for approval procedure. No consideration shall be given to any installer not preapproved.
B.
C.
2.02
DEVICES AND FACEPLATES A. Data jacks: Single outlet RJ45, eight-pin/eight wire, modular construction, TIA/EIA-568-B.21 Category 6 compliant with T568A&B identification. Manufacturer: Panduit Mini-Com #CJ688TP. Voice jacks: Same as data jacks. Voice wall-mount faceplate/jack assembly: Stainless steel with Category 6 keystone jack. Manufacturer: Panduit #KWP6P.
B. C.
D. Faceplates: Single gang, modular construction with one or two modular inserts as required. Manufacturer: Panduit #CBE series plates with #CHS2 inserts. E. Provide faceplate blank inserts and blank modules as required. Manufacturer: Panduit #CHB2 (inserts) and #CBM (modules). Color: Devices as selected by Owner, faceplates as selected by Architect.
F.
16742-2
2.03
CABLES AND CABLE ASSEMBLIES A. Backbone (trunk) cables 1. 2. B. #24 AWG, Category 3, solid copper, plenum rated (unless enclosed in conduit the entire length). 100 unshielded twisted pair, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
Station cables (voice and data): Four unshielded, twisted pair, #24 AWG, Category 6 500 MHz, solid copper conductor, cable tray and plenum rated. 1. Manufacturer: General Cable #7131431 or equivalent (independently tested) meeting the following characteristics at 250 MHz: a. ACR: 9.5 dB min. @ 100m b. PS-ACR: 7.5 dB min. @ 100m c. ELFEXT:26 dB min. d. PS-ELFEXT: 23 dB min. e. NEXT: 42 dB min. f. PS-NEXT: 40 dB min. g. ATTEN.: 32.8 dB max. @ 100m h. LCL: 26 dB min. i. Return Loss: 17.3 dB min.
2.04
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Punch-down and connecting blocks 1. 2. Category 6 rated. 110-style base with mounting legs, 96-pair (24 port) or 288-pair (72 port) as required by cable/conductor count. High density 144-pair (36 port) or 432-pair (108 port) bases also acceptable. Manufacturer: Panduit #GPBW series. 4-pair connecting blocks for station cables. Manufacturer: Panduit #GPCB4 series. 5-pair connecting blocks for backbone cables. Manufacturer: Panduit #GPCB5 series.
3. 4. B.
Cable management: 1. 2. 3. 6" die-cast aluminum distribution rings. Manufacturer: Allen Tel #GB13C or equivalent. Plenum Velcro cable ties. Manufacturer: Panduit #LSP series or equivalent. Cable hooks with retainers. Manufacturer: B-Line #BCH series or equivalent.
16742-3
C.
Patch panels 1. Patch panels shall have modular jack-style termination connectors, be 24-port or 48-port in size, one or two standard EIA rack spaces in height. The panels shall have separate port and panel designation strips. Manufacturer: Panduit #CP24BL or #CP48BL. Quantity: As required by station cable count.
2.
D. Data rack (DR) 1. 2. 84, floor-mounted, EIA/TIA 19 rack assembly. Manufacturer: Panduit #CMR19X84 or equivalent, quantity as shown on Drawings. Provide horizontal cable management panels with integral bend radius control for front and rear cables. Size and quantity determined by cable and patch panel quantity. Manufacturer: Panduit #NCMH2 or equal. Provide full height 4x5 vertical cable management panels for front and rear cables. Panels required on both sides of rack. Manufacturer: Panduit #WMPV45 or equal.
3.
E.
Identification 1. Panduit #LS5 or Pan Mark labeling systems or equivalent. Hand lettering not acceptable.
F.
Power strip 1. 2. 3. 19 rack-mounted surge suppression strip. Six (6) NEMA 5-20 duplex receptacles. UL1449 listed. Clamping level not to exceed 330 volts. Manufacturer: Leviton #5500-192 or equivalent. Quantity: Provide one power strip per data rack.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. 3.02 Store system equipment in cool, dry space prior to installation.
GENERAL A. B. Securely install components where shown on Drawings. Contractor shall adjust and provide all other assistance required at final inspection to bring the system satisfactorily on-line. Install in accordance with NEC, EIA/TIA Standards, UL listing, and manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
C.
D. Cable
16742-4
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.03 VOICE A.
Install cables in raceways as required by Section 16741 and in cable tray (communications type) where cable tray is specified. Route open air cables (where not in raceway or cable tray) parallel or perpendicular to building construction supporting with specified products, maximum 4'-0 on center. Bundle multiple open air cable runs located in TTB/TB rooms together with Velcro cable ties. Identify ends of cables with room designations as directed by Owner. Bending radius shall be minimum 1". All cable runs shall be continuous, NO SPLICING.
Install punch-down blocks at TTB/TB. Arrange one set of punch-down blocks for backbone cable(s) and second set for station cables. Install backbone cable(s) from TTB to TB(s) as shown on the Drawings. Install voice station cables from punch-down blocks at TTB/TB to the voice outlet locations as shown on the Drawings, terminated and identified at both ends according to Owners convention.
B. C.
D. Provide cross-connect conductors to interconnect corresponding connecting blocks. E. 3.04 Identify all punch-down blocks and faceplates according to Owners convention.
DATA A. B. C. Provide data rack(s) as shown and specified. Install patch panels and cable management system in each data rack. Install data station cable from patch panel to data outlet locations as shown on the Drawings. Identify cable at both ends according to Owners convention. Cable length not to exceed 295 feet.
D. Terminate cables according to T568A or T568B wiring scheme as determined by Owners system requirements. E. Identify all patch panels and faceplates according to Owners convention.
16742-5
3.05
TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. All terminated voice and data cables shall be tested and certified for TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 standards. The test shall be performed on the permanent link configuration (from station jack to patch panel jack). These standards require the following when tested at 250 MHz: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. Near End Cross Talk (NEXT) shall be no less than 35.3dB. Power Sum Near End Cross Talk (PSNEXT) shall be no less than 32.7dB. Equal Level Far End Cross Talk (ELFEXT) shall be no less than 16.2dB. Power Sum Equal Level Far End Cross Talk (PSELFEXT) shall be no less than 13.2 dB. Return Loss shall be no less than 10.0dB. Propagation Delay shall be less than 498 nanoseconds when measured at 10 MHz. Propagation Delay Skew shall be less than 44 nanoseconds when measured at 10 MHz. Insertion Loss (Attenuation) shall not exceed 31.1dB.
Additional testing shall include line mapping, reversals, shorts, opens, crosstalk, etc. before final acceptance by Owner. All permanent link cable runs shall be documented with a hard copy print-out of the test results. Compile one copy of test results in a loose-leaf binder, similar to manual referenced in Section 16010-1.04E. Submit at project completion with Record Manuals.
C.
D. Field tester to be Level III and conform to TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 Annex A & B requirements. E. The Owner may request that a 10% random field re-test be conducted on the cable system, at no additional cost, to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repeat of those defined above. If findings contradict the documentation submitted by the Contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent determined necessary by the Owner, including a 100% re-test. This re-test shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.06
16742-6
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. B. Provide Fiber Optic Cabling System as shown and described.
Fiber Optic Cabling Section 16743 Page 1
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. General Provisions Identification Raceways Cable Tray Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Voice/Data Rough-in Voice/Data Cabling Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16110 Section 16114 Section 16130 Section 16741 Section 16742
C.
Work furnished and installed by others. 1. The Owner will provide all end-user software, programming, computer servers, hubs/switches, media converters, and personal computers.
D. Description of System 1. Fiber optic work shall include but not be limited to raceway installation, pulling of fiber optic cable, splicing and terminating of cable assemblies and final acceptance testing.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. B. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010.
C.
Record Drawings 1. Indicate exact locations of junction boxes containing cable for future connection.
16743-1
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER A. All reference to model numbers and other pertinent information is intended to establish the standards of operational concepts, performance, quality, and appearance that must be met. Acceptable installers/suppliers: 1. 2.02 Refer to Specification Section 16742, 2.01C.
B.
FIBER OPTIC RACEWAY A. B. C. Corrugated, non-metallic, flexible raceway for use in plenum and non-plenum applications. Size as required or as indicated on Drawings. Provide associated fittings as required.
D. Manufacturer: Carlon Plenum-Gard series or equal. 2.03 FIBER OPTIC CABLE A. B. C. All cables shall be UL 1666 OFNP rated. Cables to be 900 m tight-buffered. Multimode Cable 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.04 Plenum-rated twelve-fiber distribution style. 50/125 m diameter. Maximum attenuation loss shall be 3.0 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm. Bandwidth (MHz/km) shall be 2000 @ 850 nm and 500 @ 1300 nm. Installation load rating greater than 300 pounds. Manufacturer: General Photonics #CP0121B3U or equal.
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Connectors 1. 2. Style and specifications as required by owners equipment. Factory terminated pigtails. Length as required. CONNECTORS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
FIELD INSTALLABLE
16743-2
B.
Patch Panel 1. 2. 3. Standard 19 rack mounting. Connector style and specifications as required by Owners equipment. Factory-terminated pigtails shall have length as required to route pigtails from data rack to splice box.
C.
Pulling Lubricant 1. Water-based, liquid-type designed not to stress-crack polyethylene .
D. Identification: 1. Panduit #LS5 or Pan Mark labeling systems, or equivalent. Hand lettering not acceptable.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. 3.02 Store fiber optic cable in cool, dry space prior to installation.
GENERAL A. Install in accordance with NEC, EIA/TIA Standards, product listing, and manufacturers recommendations and instructions. Cable 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Route cables parallel or perpendicular to building construction. Cable to be enclosed in raceway as described in Section 2.02 of this Specification unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Identify ends of cables as directed by Owner/Engineer. Bending radius as per cable specifications. All cable runs shall be continuous between termination points; NO SPLICING.
B.
Terminations 1. 2. Fusion splice connector pigtails to cables. END CONNECTORS IN THE FIELD NOT ACCEPTABLE. Identify connectors as directed by Owner / Engineer. TERMINATION OF
16743-3
3.03
TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. All fiber optic strands shall be tested and certified for EIA/TIA 568 standards. standards require the following: 1. 2. 3. B. These
Attenuation loss not to exceed 3.0 dB/km @ 850 nm for 50/125 multimode cables and 1.0 dB/km @ 1310 nm for 9/125 single mode cables. 0.75 dB per mated pair of connectors. 0.30 dB per splice.
Each fiber shall be tested at 1310 nm with an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). 1. 2. A print-out of the final OTDR trace for each fiber shall be included with the Record Manuals. NOTE: It is recommended that all fiber optic cables be tested prior to installation to determine that the cable is free from manufacturing defects and shipping damage.
C.
Using a light source/power meter, test each fiber for overall attenuation loss. Submit meter readings for each fiber with Record Manuals.
D. Electrical Contractor responsible for cost to replace all unsatisfactory cables due to breaks, fractures, and bad splices as determined by testing. 3.04 CLEANING A. B. Clean and vacuum interior to remove all wire and insulation scraps, dust and dirt. Clean all exposed surfaces immediately prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION
16743-4
Intercommunication and Program System Section 16760 Page 1
Provide complete and operational School Intercommunication and Program System.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. General Provisions Identification Raceways Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Clock and Program System Voice and Data Cabling Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16110 Section 16130 Section 16730 Section 16742
C.
Description Of System 1. The system shall be a local operating network (LON)-based, multi-channel, microprocessor-controlled communications system. The system shall be capable of simultaneously handling telephone conversations, intercom, program, and page distribution standard DTMF telephones with electronic ringers and 25V speakers. The system shall allow different ratios of speaker stations to telephones and not require that a speaker station be associated with a telephone to provide two-way voice communication. a. The system shall provide the following functions: 1) Provide capability for administrative intercom system functions to be accessed via 2500 DTMF-type telephone instruments. 2) Provide capability for DTMF-type telephones to call individual classroom speakers, zone page, all-call page, emergency page, and activate other alarm and time tones. 3) Provide microprocessor-based equipment of modular design, using plug-in, LAT-CON connections between all modules. Terminated field cabling will be labeled punch block arrangement to simplify servicing. 4) Provide a system that is UL-listed and CSA approved. 5) Provide the capability of (32) global telephonic links . 6) Provide the capability of four intercom channels accessible by any of the administrative of standard telephones in the system. 7) Provide each intercom channel with 15 watts of intercom to a 25 volt speaker. 8) Provide the capability of two paging/program channels. 9) Two program sources. 10) Simultaneous program distribution directed from any ATEL or standard telephone without interrupting intercom channels. 11) Provide one central control unit containing all the electronics required to handle all the functions of 150 remote stations in a floor rack model cabinet. 12) Provide system check with self-diagnostics. 16760-1
13) Provide for system support of up to eight ATEL's (administrative telephone), each having identical functions and control features, and each of which can be programmed for specific secretarial or administrative operations. 14) Provide automatic gain control on intercom speech to maintain constant speech level. 15) Provide built-in battery back-up for internal system clock to maintain correct time for a period of seven days after power loss. Store all other programmed data in non-volatile EEPROM memory, to be retained indefinitely. 16) Provide automatic pre-announce tone over any loudspeaker selected for twoway communications. A privacy tone will sound whenever a loudspeaker is being monitored, with capabilities to disallow the tone from the ATEL as desired. 17) Provide paging announcements distributed from any ATEL or DTMF telephone to speaker and ACC locations on an all call, zone and multiple zone basis, to any of the thirty-two paging zones. 18) Provide a permanent global page/program distribution room speaker exclusion table, to allow exclusion of chosen speakers. 19) Room stations or loudspeakers are user-programmable to any of thirty-two available paging zones, class change zones, or no zones at all. 20) Provide unique system tones for emergency and civil emergency pages, with distribution of emergency announcements from an ATEL or DTMF telephone to all locations equipped with ATEL's or loudspeakers. Emergency announcements will automatically override all other programs. 21) Provide tone or custodial call to all speakers. 22) Provide capability for audio program distribution (microphone, tape, tuner, or aux.) to selected remote stations, specified zones or all remote stations equipped with speakers. 23) Provision for optional line supervision of an open circuit condition. 24) Provisions to override remote sound systems during all-call or emergency paging. 25) Provision for distribution of door open alarm to all speakers by closure of single switch contact. 26) Provide call transfer of current call to another ATEL. 27) Provide capability to place call on hold. 28) Provide for call assigned to a particular ATEL to be forwarded to another ATEL for call coverage. 29) Provide capability for last number redial. 30) Provide capability for speed dial access to specific remote stations. 31) Provide capability to scroll waiting calls and select calls to be answered in any order. 32) Provide capability to display ATEL's number using ATEL keypad. 33) Provide one VOX handset (for private communications), built-in microphone, speaker and push-to-talk switch on each ATEL for intercom communications. 34) Provide capability for allowing external input points to be annunciated at the ATEL. 35) Provide three levels of call-in switching.
16760-2
36) Provide call-in destination groups. 37) Provide capability to allow the ATEL to selectively monitor the program sources before or during distribution. 38) Provide manual time tones, which can be initiated by any ATEL or DTMF telephone. 39) Provide program mode on ATEL to contain access code restriction to protect the system program. 40) Provide capability for any ATEL to direct a program to any one, group of, or all remote stations and AM/FM tuner/cassette. 41) Provide self-diagnostics of each ATEL. 42) Provide easy, menu-driven programming. 43) Provide capability of ATEL programmable system functions, including: a) Architectural alphanumeric room numbers. b) 12-hour or 24-hour clock display when ATEL is in idle state. c) 500 events, sixteen time schedules, thirty-two zones and twenty-five userprogrammable tones. d) Automatic daylight savings time adjustment. e) Automatic leap year adjustment. f) Corrects both analog and digital clocks. 44) Provide factory-programmable function keys for specific system operations. 45) Provide automatic distribution or user-programmable time signals activated by an internal time clock. Five hundred (500) programmable events are available which can be programmed to thirty-two zones and sixteen schedules from an ATEL. 46) Provide capability to program room stations, zones or multiple zones to receive the program source on a selected room basis from the ATEL, with the ability to view rooms receiving program material on the ATEL display. 47) Provide capability for external DTMF telephones to automatically select and access room stations for communications. Selection of subsequent rooms can be accomplished without disconnecting the call in progress and re-dialing. 48) Provide (12) I/O ports configurable for special purpose input and output functions. 49) Provide capability of distributing a program source through an automated time event (march to music). 50) Intercommunication system shall be interfaced with systems from existing school and dormitory. New system shall match these systems. New dormitory system shall be a separate zone for separate or combined paging. PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER A. The system specified is based on equipment as manufactured by Dukane Corporation. All reference to model numbers and other pertinent information is intended to establish the standards of operational concepts, performance, quality and appearance which must be met.
16760-3
2.02
ADMINISTRATIVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM A. The administrative communication system shall be a microprocessor based Dukane Model STAR CALL. It shall be capable of providing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. Solid state, plug-in modular construction. Simultaneous two-program distribution paging and up to four-intercom channels. System capacity of 512 remote stations and/or 320 administrative control centers. User-programmable time clock. Three, and four alphanumeric digit dialing. Seven-call priority levels with automatic sequencing of each communications point. Built-in diagnostics. Non-volatile user-programmable memory. Battery-backed time clock. Off-hour door alert. Single-queue software option. Normal call to emergency call upgrade. Seven call-in priority levels, plus privacy. Emergency call-in to specified emergency stations. Distinctive ring tones for standard emergency calls. Thirty-two multi-purpose zones. Thirty-two call destination groups. Remote zone page mic. User selective call, answer from ATEL. Telephone interface capability. Two SPDT relay output ports. Two multi-function ports for clock control. Four input ports. Four in/out ports. Size to handle requirements shown on Drawing, plus a minimum of ten future stations.
2.03
ADMINISTRATIVE TELEPHONE (FIVE THUS) A. Sixteen character alphanumeric LDC display with the following features. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. C. 100 percent queuing of call room numbers. Sequential display. Sequential display of priority stations. Display of current time when idle. Full display of programmer prompting. Full display of operator function dialing.
Built-in speaker, microphone, and handset. "Forward" capability of administrative control center to another.
16760-4
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico D. Color-coded waterproof touchpad. E. F.
LED indicators to indicate whether a specific function key is "on" or "off". Expansion modules included: 1. 2. RPD single-queue feature software. Automatic remote access.
G. H. 2.04
Capability to add administrative functions from DTMF phone. Capability to inter-tie with all makes of telephone systems.
CLASSROOM TELEPHONE (5 THUS) A. Standard DTMF desk/wall mount as indicated with message light. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Three programmable one-touch dialing buttons for Emergency or Urgent Calls. Store up to nine additional numbers in memory. Memory protected by long-life Lithium battery. Flash and redial buttons. Adjustable ringer volume. Manufacturer: Dukane Model 7A1111.
2.05
TUNER/CASSETTE A. The tuner/cassette shall be a Dukane RTC350P rack-mount device designed for continuous use as a program source. 1. The tuner shall provide drift-free reception of both AM and FM broadcast stations. The AM section shall be tunable over a range of 520 to 1,650 kHz with a sensitivity of 12 UV (20 dB quieting). The FM section shall be tunable over a range of 88 to 108 MHz with a sensitivity of 4.5 uV (50 dB quieting). Antenna connection shall be standard RG59 U connector. Front panel controls to provide tuner "on/off", AM/FM selection, tuning control and tone control. The cassette player shall be capable of playing all standard audiocassettes. Frequency response shall be 50 Hz to 12,000 Hz with less than 0.14 percent (WRMS) wow and flutter. Signal to noise ratio 45 dB or better. The cassette player shall be of the autoreverse type and shall incorporate controls for direction, eject, rewind and fast forward.
2.
2.06
PROGRAM AMPLIFIER A. The program amplifier shall be a Dukane Model 1A4250. The amplifier shall employ silicone transistors exclusively and be capable of delivering 250 watts output at less than three- percent distortion, 40 to 20,000 Hz plus-minus 2dB. Rated output shall be obtained with 0.4 volt input.
16760-5
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico 2.07 CABLE A. Call-in/speaker. 1. 2. B.
Four-conductor, 22 AWG stranded with overall shield. Plenum or non-plenum as required.
Speaker 1. 2. Two-conductor, 22 AWG stranded with overall shield. Plenum or non-plenum as required.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. Store all Intercommunications and Program System components in a cool, dry space prior to installation.
3.02
INSTALLATION A. General 1. Provide interconnection between telephone equipment and new Intercommunication and Program System. Inter-connection shall consist of one 12-pair Category 3 telephone cable. Cable shall be installed in 3/4" conduit. Install in accordance with Code, product listing, and manufacturers recommendations. Exercise particular care for installation of control rough in boxes to ensure plumb and level placement. Install all components in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. 3. 4. 3.03
TESTING A. Prior to final inspection, verify that the system is in proper working condition. Furnish letter of verification to Engineer indicating that the system has been tested by a manufacturers representative. List date of test and name of manufacturers representative.
3.04
INSTRUCTIONS A. Manufacturer's representative to instruct Owner in proper operation, maintenance and testing of the complete system. Include name of Owners representative in letter of verification. Videotape instructions and include with manual in accordance with Section 16010.
B.
16760-6
3.05
16760-7
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. B. Provide TV Signal Cabling System as shown on Drawings.
TV Signal Cabling Section 16780 Page 1
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. General Provisions Identification Raceways Cable Tray Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Wiring Devices and Device Plates Section 16010 Section 16040 Section 16110 Section 16114 Section 16130 Section 16140
C.
Work furnished and installed by others. 1. Building service entrance cable to the TV cabinet not in contract.
D. Description of System 1. The system shall have the capability to distribute signals supplied by the local cable company, Channel One, and one channel of locally generated programming (Ownerfurnished VCR, DVD, video camera, etc.). Each TV outlet will require a separate feed from the TV distribution rack. The signals shall be combined, amplified, and distributed to the classrooms in the following manner: a. When in the normal state, all programs will be distributed to all the classrooms simultaneously. b. Each classroom shall contain a switched input to allow the use of an Ownersupplied VCR cart to generate local program within the classroom. The system shall provide for expansion of the system of future inputs, up to eight (8) total.
2.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. 2. B. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Indicate mounting details, connection diagrams and description of system functions.
Record Manuals 1. 2. Submit information in accordance with Section 16010. Include manufacturer's data for adjustment, operation and maintenance of equipment and name of service organization.
16780-1
Provide multiple copies, one to remain in central cabinet, other copies for Record Manuals.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER A. The system specified is based on equipment as manufactured by Blonder Tongue and other manufacturers as listed. All reference to model numbers and other pertinent information is intended to establish the standards of operational concepts, performance, quality and appearance which must be met.
2.02
AMPLIFIER A. B. C. Rack-mounted distribution amplifier. 50 MHz to 750 MHz frequency range. 35 dB gain.
D. Manufacturer: Blonder Tongue Model #RMDA 750-30P. 2.03 COMBINER A. B. C. Rack-mounted eight input active combiner. 50 MHz to 450 MHz frequency range. 22 dB gain.
D. Manufacturer: Blonder Tongue Model #OCA-8b. 2.04 SPLITTERS A. B. C. Radiation shielded with one input and outputs as required. Meet CATV and SMATV requirements for RF shielding. 10 MHz to 900 MHz frequency range.
D. Connections to use F type shielded hex crimped connectors. E. Manufacturer: Blonder Tongue CRS series.
16780-2
2.05
OUTLETS A. TV jacks: F-type connector supplied with 75 ohm self-terminating F-type coupler for SUB/VHF/CATV/UHF. Manufacturer: Panduit Mini-Com #CMFSR series. Faceplates: Single-gang, vertical faceplate accepting modular jack(s). Panduit #CFP series plates. Color as selected by Architect. Manufacturer:
B.
C.
Where TV and voice/data outlets are shown ganged together on the Drawings, device plates furnished under Section 16742.
2.06
EQUIPMENT CABINET A. B. C. 42" high welded and bonded 16-gauge steel cabinet. Wall-mount type. Manufacturer: Home #193-42 or equivalent.
2.07
LOCAL TV INPUT JACK A. Two-way RF coaxial switch with a single output G/F connector mounted on a two-gang stainless steel plate. Engrave plate as directed by Engineer. Manufacturer: Blonder Tongue #ZAB-2/#V-1GF-FT.
B. C. 2.08
CABLE A. Cable 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. #18 AWG .040 copper. 100% foil with 60% aluminum braid. Type RG-6. Plenum-rated where installed above accessible ceilings and not in raceway. Manufacturer: Belden #9116 or #9116P (plenum-rated).
Cable Management 1. 2. 3. Six inch die-cast aluminum distribution rings: Manufacturer: Allen Tel #GB13C or equivalent. Velcro cable-ties: Manufacturer: Panduit HLX series or equivalent. Bridle rings: Manufacturer: B-Line BR series or equivalent.
16780-3
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. 3.02
Store TV signal cabling components in a cool, dry space prior to installation.
INSTALLATION A. B. Install in accordance with Code, product listing, and manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor shall adjust and provide all other assistance required at final inspection to bring the system satisfactorily on-line. Service Conduit 1. 2. 3. 4. Provide CATV service entrance conduit, stubbed to telephone terminal board from property line. Verify service entrance conduit size, minimum 2, and property line location with the service utility. Provide bushing or connector at each conduit stub. Provide pull wire in each CATV conduit run.
C.
D. Cable 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E. Route cables parallel or perpendicular to building construction. Support cables with bridle rings, maximum 6'-0 on center. Bundle multiple cable runs together with velcro cable ties, maximum 3-0 on center. Identify ends of cables with room designations as directed by Owner. Minimum one inch bending radius. All cable runs shall be continuous, NO SPLICING.
Conduit 1. 2. Provide minimum 3/4" conduit, where cable is concealed within new walls, in mechanical rooms and rooms without ceilings. Cable not required to be enclosed in conduit where installed: a. In existing walls. b. Above existing plaster ceilings. c. Above accessible ceilings.
F. G. H.
Provide F-type, shielded, hex-crimped connectors at all cable ends. Provide splitters where indicated. Switches and outlets shall be properly shielded to eliminate any leakage of signal. Tap values shall be designed so that signal levels can be kept at no more than +5 dB on Channel 41 @ 300 MHz.
16780-4
Pueblo Pintado K-8 School Dormitory II Project Number Y9N3N000 Cuba, New Mexico I.
Exercise particular care for installation of control rough-in boxes to ensure plumb and level placement. Entire installation to comply with Owner's cable requirements.
J. 3.03
TESTS A. Prior to final inspection, verify that the system is installed in accordance with serving utility standards, and in proper working condition. Furnish letter of verification to Engineer indicating that the system has been tested by a manufacturer's representative. List date of test and name of manufacturer's representative.
3.04
INSTRUCTIONS A. Manufacturers representative to instruct Owner in proper operation, maintenance and testing of the complete system. Include name of Owners representative in letter of verification. Videotape instructions and include with Record Manuals in accordance with Section 16010.
B. 3.05
16780-5
Electric Heating Equipment Section 16850 Page 1
Furnish and install all electric heating equipment as scheduled on Drawings.
Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. 2. 3. 4. General Provisions Raceways Conductor Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes Section 16010 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16130
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. B. Provide information in accordance with Section 16010.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Size, wattage and control as scheduled.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE A. 3.02 Store electric heating equipment in a cool, dry space prior to installation.
INSTALLATION A. B. Install in accordance with Code, product listing and manufacturers recommendations. Mount baseboard heaters above Architectural base. END OF SECTION
16850-1
Connections to Equipment Section 16910 Page 1
The Contractor shall provide operational electrical connections to all electrically driven or controlled equipment.
PART 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials and labor required to make final operational connections to all equipment, generally as shown on the Drawings, and specifically as required by equipment specifications and installation literature. Control devices and panels furnished by others will be delivered to the contractor at the jobsite, and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Review equipment specifications to determine extent of work involved.
2.
PART 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide operational connections for all equipment shown on the Drawings. Connections shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be left operating in a manner acceptable to the Engineer and Owner. For all exterior mechanical equipment, provide weatherproof GFCI receptacle outlet within 25' of equipment, circuited to nearest unswitched power. Refer to NEC 210.63 and 406.8. For all mechanical equipment located in attic and crawl spaces, provide porcelain lamp holder with integral receptacle and lamp guard, circuited to nearest unswitched power via pilot handle toggle switch near access hatch. Engrave plate. Refer to NEC 210.70(C).
B.
C.
3.02
16910-1
SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for combined water service and fire-service mains. DEFINITIONS PE: Polyethylene plastic. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components. 1. C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for alarms.
1.2 A.
1.3 A. B. 1.4 A. B.
Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations. Field quality-control test reports. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements:
D. E.
1.5 A.
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
221113 - 1
1. 2.
3.
Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for firesuppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
B. C.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression. NSF Compliance: 1. 2. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water.
D. E. F.
G.
1.6 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Preparation for Transport: according to the following: 1. 2. 3. Prepare valves, including fire hydrants,
Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B.
During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following: 1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 221113 - 2
2.
Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.
C.
Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. Notify A/E no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without A/Es written permission.
D.
E. F. G.
1.7 A.
1.8 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper.
221113 - 3
1.
2.
Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. Copper, Pressure-Seal Fittings: a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) c. d. Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems.
b.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM Oring seal in each end. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Bronze fitting with stainless-steel grip ring and EPDM O-ring seal in each end.
B.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. Copper, Pressure-Seal Fittings: a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) c. d. Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems.
2.
b.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM Oring seal in each end. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Bronze fitting with stainless-steel grip ring and EPDM O-ring seal in each end.
C. D.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
221113 - 4
2.2 A.
DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
2. B. 2.3 A.
Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron. PE PIPE AND FITTINGS PE, ASTM Pipe: ASTM D 2239, SIDR No. 5.3, 7, or 9; with PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 200 psig. 1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, made of PA, PP, or PVC with serrated male insert ends matching inside of pipe. Include bands or crimp rings. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket- or buttfusion type, made to match PE pipe dimensions and class.
2. B.
PE, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C906, DR No. 7.3, 9, or 9.3; with PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 200 psig. 1. PE, AWWA Fittings: AWWA C906, socket- or butt-fusion type, with DR number matching pipe and PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 200 psig.
C.
PE, Fire-Service Pipe: ASTM F 714, AWWA C906, or equivalent for PE water pipe; FMG approved, with minimum thickness equivalent to FMG Class 200. 1. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket- or buttfusion type, made to match PE pipe dimensions and class.
2.4 A.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS PVC, Schedule 40 Pipe: ASTM D 1785. 1. PVC, Schedule 40 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466.
B.
PVC, Schedule 80 Pipe: ASTM D 1785.
1. PVC, Schedule 80 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
221113 - 5
2. C.
PVC, Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464.
PVC, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 200, with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end. 1. 2. Comply with UL 1285 for fire-service mains if indicated. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, Class 200, with bell-andspigot or double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. PVC Molded Fittings: AWWA C907, Class 150, with bell-andspigot or double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. 5. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
3.
4.
Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or grayiron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
2.5 A. B. C. D.
JOINING MATERIALS Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used joining materials. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. PIPING SPECIALTIES Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 1.
2.6 A.
B.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 6
2.
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. JCM Industries. Smith-Blair, Inc. Viking Johnson.
3.
Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined. a. b. c. d. e. Standard: AWWA C219. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. Pressure Rating: : 200 psig minimum. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
C.
Split-Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3. Victaulic Depend-O-Lok.
2.
Description: Metal, bolted, split-sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling with sealing pad and closure plates, O-ring gaskets, and bolt fasteners. a. b. c. d. e. f. Standard: AWWA C219. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating. Gasket Material: O-rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated. Pressure Rating: : 200 psig minimum. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
D.
Flexible Connectors: 221113 - 7
1.
2.
Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-tube, pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose. Ferrous-Metal Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wire braid; with ASME B1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to hose.
E.
Dielectric Fittings: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, or plain end types; and matching piping system materials. 1. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, designed for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled companionflange assembly, full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel couplings with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types, and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.7 A.
CORROSION-PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Standards: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. Form: : Sheet or tube. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness, or highdensity, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness. Material: High-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness. Color: Black.
221113 - 8
2.8 A.
GATE VALVES AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 4. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe Div.; Utilities Div. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. NIBCO INC. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.
2. 3.
Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut. 1) 2) 3) 4) Standard: AWWA C509. Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. End Connections: Mechanical joint. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
2.9 A.
GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 221113 - 9
2.
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. Flowserve. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.
4.
Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine. a. b. Standard: MSS SP-60. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, twopiece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.
c.
B.
Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter. 1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut. Centering Adapter: Valve Boxes shall be held in-place to the gate valves with a centering adapter, compatable with the valve used.
2. C.
Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve. CHECK VALVES AWWA Check Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be 221113 - 10
2.10 A.
2. 3.
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. APCO Williamette; Valve and Primer Corporation. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. NIBCO INC. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
4.
Description: Swing-check type with resilient seat. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550 and ends to match piping. a. b. Standard: AWWA C508. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
2.11 A.
DETECTOR CHECK VALVES Detector Check Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. Badger Meter, Inc. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters. Victaulic Company of America. Viking Corporation. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 221113 - 11
2. 3.
4.
Description: Galvanized cast-iron body, bolted cover with airbleed device for access to internal parts, and flanged ends. Include one-piece bronze disc with bronze bushings, pivot, and replaceable seat. Include threaded bypass taps in inlet and outlet for bypass meter connection. Set valve to allow minimal water flow through bypass meter when major water flow is required. a. b. c. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. Water Meter: AWWA C700, disc type, at least one-fourth size of detector check valve. Include meter, bypass piping, gate valves, check valve, and connections to detector check valve.
5.
Description: Iron body, corrosion-resistant clapper ring and seat ring material, flanged ends, with connections for bypass and installation of water meter. a. b. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
2.12 A.
BUTTERFLY VALVES AWWA Butterfly Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 4. DeZURIK/Copes-Vulcan; a unit of SPX Corporation. Milliken Valve Company. Mosser Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. Pratt, Henry Company. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.
2. 3.
Description: Rubber seated. a. b. c. d. Standard: AWWA C504. Body: Cast or ductile iron. Body Type: : Wafer or flanged. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 221113 - 12
2.13 A.
CORPORATION VALVES AND CURB VALVES Manufacturers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Amcast Industrial Corporation; Lee Brass Co. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. Jones, James Company. Master Meter, Inc. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. Red Hed Manufacturing & Supply.
2.
B.
Service-Saddle Assemblies: Comply with AWWA C800. Include saddle and valve compatible with tapping machine. 1. 2. Service Saddle: Copper alloy with seal and AWWA C800, threaded outlet for corporation valve. Corporation Valve: Bronze body and ground-key plug, with AWWA C800, threaded inlet and outlet matching service piping material. Manifold: Copper fitting with two to four inlets as required, with ends matching corporation valves and outlet matching service piping material.
3.
C.
Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800. Include bronze body, groundkey plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve boxes. Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb valve and with a barrel approximately 3 inches in diameter. 1. Shutoff Rods: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.
D.
2.14 A.
WATER METERS Contractor shall provide water meters approved by the utility company. 221113 - 13
B.
Manufacturers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. AMCO Water Metering Systems. Badger Meter, Inc. Carlon Meter. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. McCrometer. Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters. Neptune Technology Group Inc. Sensus Metering Systems.
2. 3.
C.
Compound-Type Water Meters: 1. Description: a. b. Standard: AWWA C702. Registration: Flow in gallons.
D.
Remote Registration System: 1. Description: Utility company standard; direct-reading type. Include meter modified with signal-transmitting assembly, lowvoltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly. a. b. Standard: AWWA C706. Registration: Flow in gallons.
E.
Remote Registration System: 1. Description: Utility company standard; encoder type. Include meter modified with signal-transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly. a. b. c. d. Standard: AWWA C707. Registration: Flow in gallons. Data-Acquisition Units: Comply with utility company requirements for type and quantity. Visible Display Units: Comply with utility company requirements for type and quantity. 221113 - 14
2.15 A.
PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES Water Regulators: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Cash Acme; a division of The Reliance Worldwide Corporation. Conbraco Industries, Inc. Honeywell Water Controls. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div.
2. 3.
11. 12. B.
Standard: ASSE 1003. Pressure Rating: Initial pressure of 150 psig. Size: As indicted on plans. Design Flow Rate: As indicated on plans. Design Inlet Pressure: As indicated on plans. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: As indicated on plans. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 21/2 and NPS 3. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
Water Control Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves. Flomatic Corporation. OCV Control Valves. 221113 - 15
2. 3.
d. e. f. 4.
Watts Regulator Co.; Ames Fluid Control Systems. Watts Regulator Co.; Watts ACV Division. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div.
Description: Pilot-operation, diaphragm-type, single-seated main water control valve with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating. Include small pilot control valve, restrictor device, specialty fittings, and sensor piping. a. b. Pressure Rating: Initial pressure of 150 psig minimum. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body. 1) 2) 3) c. d. e. f. Size: As indicated on the plans. Pattern: : Globe-valve design. Trim: Stainless steel.
Design Flow Rate: As indicated on plans. Design Inlet Pressure: As indicated on plans Design Outlet Pressure Setting: As indicated on plans. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2.16 A.
RELIEF VALVES Air-Release Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. 4. Crispin-Multiplex Manufacturing Co. GA Industries, Inc. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.
2. 3.
Description: Hydromechanical device to automatically release accumulated air. a. b. c. Standard: AWWA C512. Pressure Rating: 300 psig. Body Material: Cast iron. 221113 - 16
d. e. f. g. h. B.
Trim Material: Stainless steel. Water Inlet Size: As indicated on plans. Air Outlet Size: As indicated on plans. Orifice Size: As indicated on plans. Design Air-Release Capacity: As indicated on plans at pipeline pressure.
Air/Vacuum Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. 4. Crispin-Multiplex Manufacturing Co. GA Industries, Inc. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.
2. 3.
Description: Direct-acting, float-operated, hydromechanical device with large orifice to automatically release accumulated air or to admit air during filling of piping. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Standard: AWWA C512. Pressure Rating: 300 psig. Body Material: Cast iron. Trim Material: Stainless steel. Inlet and Outlet Size: As indicated on plans. Orifice Size: As indicated on plans. Design Air Capacity: As indicated on plans at differential pressure.
C.
Combination Air Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. Crispin-Multiplex Manufacturing Co. GA Industries, Inc. 221113 - 17
2. 3.
c. 4.
Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. device to
Description: Float-operated, hydromechanical automatically release accumulated air or to admit air. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Standard: AWWA C512. Pressure Rating: 300 psig. Body Material: Cast iron. Trim Material: Stainless steel. Inlet and Outlet Size: As indicated on plans. Orifice Size: As indicated on plans. Design Air Capacity: As indicated on plans at differential pressure.
2.17 A.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. Conbraco Industries, Inc. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. Flomatic Corporation. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div.
2. 3.
Standard: AWWA C511. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. Size: As indicated on plans. Design Flow Rate: As indicated on plans. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: As indicated on plans. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: As indicated on plans. for NPS 2 and smaller; 12 psig for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 221113 - 18
12. 13. 14.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow preventer connection.
b. B.
Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. Conbraco Industries, Inc. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. Flomatic Corporation. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div.
2. 3.
12. 13. 14.
Standard: AWWA C510. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. Size: As indicated on plans. Design Flow Rate: As indicated on plans. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: As indicated on plans. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: As indicated on plans. for NPS 2 and smaller; 5 psig for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. Accessories: Ball valves with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; OS&Y gate valves with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 221113 - 19
C.
Reduced-Pressure-Detector, Assemblies: 1.
Fire-Protection
Backflow
Preventer
2. 3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. Conbraco Industries, Inc. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Standards: ASSE 1047 and UL listed or FMG approved. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. Size: As indicated on plans. Design Flow Rate: As indicated on plans. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: As indicated on plans. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: 12 psig. Body: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved Stainless steel. End Connections: Flanged. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. Accessories: a. b. c. Valves: UL 262, FMG-approved, OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow preventer connection. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer.
D.
Double-Check, Detector-Assembly Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 221113 - 20
2.
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. Conbraco Industries, Inc. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Standards: ASSE 1048 and UL listed or FMG approved. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. Size: As indicated on plans. Design Flow Rate: As indicated on plans. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: 5 psig. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: As indicated on plans. Body: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved Stainless steel. End Connections: Flanged. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. Accessories: a. b. Valves: UL 262, FMG-approved, OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer.
2.18 A.
WATER METER BOXES Description: Cast-iron body and cover for disc-type water meter, with lettering "WATER METER" in cover; and with slotted, open-bottom base section of length to fit over service piping. 1. Option: Base section may be cast-iron, PVC, clay, or other pipe.
B.
Description: Cast-iron body and double cover for disc-type water meter, with lettering "WATER METER" in top cover; and with separate inner cover; air space between covers; and slotted, open-bottom base section of length to fit over service piping. Description: Polymer-concrete body and cover for disc-type water meter, with lettering "WATER" in cover; and with slotted, open-bottom base section of length to fit over service piping. Include vertical and lateral design loadings of 15,000 lb minimum over 10 by 10 inches square. 221113 - 21
C.
2.19 A.
CONCRETE VAULTS Description: Precast, reinforced-concrete vault, designed for A-16 load designation according to ASTM C 857 and made according to ASTM C 858. 1. 2. Ladder: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel or polyethylene-encased steel steps. Manhole: ASTM A 48/A 48M Class No. 35A minimum tensile strength, gray-iron traffic frame and cover. a. 3. Dimension: indicated. 24-inch minimum diameter, unless otherwise
Manhole: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron traffic frame and cover. a. Dimension: 24-inch- minimum diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Drain: ASME A112.6.3, cast-iron floor drain with outlet of size indicated. Include body anchor flange, light-duty cast-iron grate, bottom outlet, and integral or field-installed bronze ball or clappertype backwater valve.
2.20 A.
PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURES Freeze-Protection Enclosures: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Aqua Shield. BF Products, Inc. DekoRRa Products. Dunco Manufacturing, Inc. G&C Enclosures. Hot Box, Inc. HydroCowl, Inc. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. 3.
221113 - 22
4.
Description: Insulated enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from freezing and damage, with heat source to maintain minimum internal temperature of 40 deg F when external temperatures reach as low as minus 34 deg F. a. b. c. Standard: ASSE 1060. Class I: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum breakers. Class I-V: For pressure or atmospheric vacuum breaker equipment or devices. Include drain opening in housing. 1) Housing: Reinforced-aluminum construction. a) Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for access and service of protected unit. Drain opening for units with drain connection. Access doors with locking devices. Insulation inside housing. Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base.
b) c) d) e) 2) B.
Electric heating cable or heater with self-limiting temperature control.
Weather-Resistant Enclosures: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 4. Aqua Shield. BF Products, Inc. DekoRRa Products. Dunco Manufacturing, Inc. G&C Enclosures. Hot Box, Inc. HydroCowl, Inc. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. 3.
Description: Uninsulated enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from weather and damage. 221113 - 23
a. b. c.
Standard: ASSE 1060. Class III: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum breakers. Class III-V: For pressure or atmospheric vacuum breaker equipment or devices. Include drain opening in housing. 1) Housing: Reinforced-aluminum construction. a) Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for access and service of protected unit. Drain opening for units with drain connection. Access doors with locking devices. Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base.
b) c) d)
2.21 A.
FIRE HYDRANTS Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. 4. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. American Foundry Group, Inc. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. Troy Valve; a division of Penn-Troy Manufacturing, Inc. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.
2. 3.
Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4-1/2 and two NPS 21/2 outlets, 5-1/4-inch main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 mechanical-joint inlet. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550. Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compressiontype valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure. a. Standard: AWWA C502. 221113 - 24
b. 5.
Pressure Rating: : 250 psig.
Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4-1/2 and two NPS 21/2 outlets, 5-1/4-inch main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 mechanical-joint inlet. Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compression-type valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure. a. b. c. Standards: UL 246, FMG approved. Pressure Rating: : 250 psig. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. Include cast-iron caps with steel chains. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 1-1/2 inches point to flat. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or counterclockwise. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd-gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated.
d. e. f.
2.22 A.
FLUSHING HYDRANTS Post-Type Flushing Hydrants: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. 4. GIL Industries, Inc. Kupferle Foundry Co. (The). Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
2. 3.
Description: Nonfreeze and drainable, of length required for shutoff valve installation below frost line. a. b. c. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. Outlet: One, with horizontal discharge. Hose Thread: NPS 2-1/2, with NFPA 1963 external hose thread for use by local fire department, and with cast-iron cap with brass chain. Barrel: Cast-iron or steel pipe with breakaway feature. Valve: Bronze body with bronze-ball or plunger closure, and automatic draining. 221113 - 25
d. e.
f. g. h. i. B.
Security: Locking device for padlock. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd-gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated. Inlet: NPS 2 minimum. Operating Wrench: One for each unit.
Ground-Type Flushing Hydrants: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. 4. Kupferle Foundry Co. (The). Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
2. 3.
Description: Nonfreeze and drainable, of length required for shutoff valve installation below frost line. a. b. c. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. Outlet: One, with angle discharge. Hose Thread: NPS 2-1/2, with NFPA 1963 external hose thread for use by local fire department, and with cast-iron cap with brass chain. Barrel: Cast-iron or steel pipe. Valve: Bronze body with bronze-ball or plunger closure, and automatic draining. Inlet: NPS 2 minimum. Hydrant Box: Cast iron with cover, for ground mounting. Operating Wrench: One for each unit.
d. e. f. g. h. 2.23 A.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS Fire Department Connections: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 221113 - 26
2. 3.
a. b. c. d. e. f. 4.
Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. Fire End & Croker Corporation. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. Kidde Fire Fighting. Potter Roemer. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
Description: Freestanding, with cast-bronze body, thread inlets according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department hose threads, and threaded bottom outlet. Include lugged caps, gaskets, and chains; lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 18-inch- high brass sleeve; and round escutcheon plate. a. b. c. d. e. Standard: UL 405. Connections: Two NPS 2-1/2 inlets and one NPS 4 outlet. Inlet Alignment: Inline, horizontal. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated Polished bronze. Escutcheon Plate Marking: " STANDPIPE."
2.24 A. B.
ALARM DEVICES Alarm Devices, General: UL 753 and FMG approved, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and equipment. Water-Flow Indicators: Vane-type water-flow detector, rated for 250psig working pressure; designed for horizontal or vertical installation; with 2 single-pole, double-throw circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal when cover is removed. Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully open position. Pressure Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal increase in pressure.
C. D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EARTHWORK Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 221113 - 27
3.2 A.
CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING The Contractor shall provide the construction staking required to layout the alignment, grades and clearances shown on the plans. 1. The construction staking shall be performed by a licensed surveyor registered in the State where the work is performed. PIPING APPLICATIONS General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults. Underground water-service piping 1 to 3 shall be the following: 1. 2. 3. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; copper, pressure-seal fittings; and pressure-sealed joints. PE, ASTM pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and clamped joints. PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
3.3 A. B. C. D.
E.
F.
Underground water-service piping NPS 4 to NPS 8 shall be the following: 1. 2. 3. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solderjoint fittings; and brazed joints. NPS 4 and NPS 6: NPS 6 PVC, AWWA Class 150 pipe; PVC, AWWA Class 150 molded fittings; and gasketed joints. NPS 8: PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe; PVC, AWWA Class 200 fabricated mechanical-joint, ductile-iron fittings; and gasketed joints.
G.
Water Meter Box Water-Service Piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 2 shall be same as underground water-service piping. VALVE APPLICATIONS General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 and larger underground installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG, nonrising-stem gate valves for 221113 - 28
3.4 A.
installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation. 3.5 A. PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping-system common requirements. PIPING INSTALLATION Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following: 1. 2. 3. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove tapping machine and connect waterservice piping. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.
3.6 A. B. C.
4. D.
Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following: 1. 2. 3. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement required by utility company standards. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for corporation valves. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.
4. 5. 6. E. F. G.
Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23. Bury piping with depth of cover over top as indicated on plans. 221113 - 29
H. I.
Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until buildingwater-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.
J. K. L.
Sleeves are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports. See Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for fire-suppression-water piping inside the building. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building. JOINT CONSTRUCTION See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint construction. Make pipe joints according to the following: 1. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use proprietary crimping tool and procedure recommended by copper, pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer. PE Piping Insert-Fitting Joints: Use plastic insert fittings and fasteners according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for joining piping of dissimilar metals. 221113 - 30
M. N.
3.7 A. B.
2. 3.
4.
3.8 A.
ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Concrete thrust blocks. Locking mechanical joints. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands. Bolted flanged joints. Heat-fused joints. Pipe clamps and tie rods.
B.
Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: 1. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23. 2. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices. VALVE INSTALLATION AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in vault or aboveground between shutoff valves. Install full-size valved bypass. Relief Valves: Comply with AWWA C512. shutoff valve on inlet. DETECTOR-CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION Install in vault or aboveground. Install for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of meter, and check valve downstream from meter. Install aboveground with
C.
3.9 A.
B. C. D. E.
3.10 A. B. C.
Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 31
3.11 A. B.
WATER METER INSTALLATION Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company's written instructions. Water Meters: Install displacement-type water meters, NPS 2 and smaller, in meter boxes with shutoff valves on water meter inlets. Include valves on water meter outlets and valved bypass around meters unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. Water Meters: Install compound-type water meters, NPS 3 and larger, in meter vaults. Include shutoff valves on water meter inlets and outlets and valved bypass around meters. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. Water Meters: Install detector-type water meters in meter vault according to AWWA M6. Include shutoff valves on water meter inlets and outlets and full-size valved bypass around meters. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS Rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility company's written instructions. VACUUM BREAKER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction. Do not install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies in vault or other space subject to flooding. BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C.
D.
3.12 A.
3.13 A.
B.
3.14 A.
B. C. D.
Support NPS 2-1/2 and larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor and on brick or concrete piers. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 32
3.15 A. B.
WATER METER BOX INSTALLATION Install water meter boxes in paved areas flush with surface. Install water meter boxes in grass or earth areas with top 2 inches above surface. CONCRETE VAULT INSTALLATION Install precast concrete vaults according to ASTM C 891. PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION Install concrete base level and with top approximately 2 inches above grade. Install protective enclosure over valves and equipment. Anchor protective enclosure to concrete base. FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position. AWWA Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17. FLUSHING HYDRANT INSTALLATION Install post-type flushing hydrants with valve below frost line and provide for drainage. Support in upright position. Include separate gate valve or curb valve and restrained joints in supply piping. Install ground-type flushing hydrants with valve below frost line and provide for drainage. Install hydrant box flush with grade. Include separate gate valve or curb valve and restrained joints in supply piping. Install sampling stations with valve below frost line and provide for drainage. Attach weather-resistant housing and support in upright position. Include separate curb valve in supply piping. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains. 221113 - 33
3.16 A. 3.17 A. B. C. 3.18 A.
B. 3.19 A.
B.
C.
3.20 A.
B.
Install protective pipe bollards on two sides of each fire department connection. Pipe bollards are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications." ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground valves with valve box do not require supervision. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position. 1. 2. Valves: Grind away portion of exposed valve stem. Bolt switch, with plunger in stem depression, to OS&Y gate-valve yoke. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper-barrel section at target plate. Install switch, with toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post.
3.21 A.
B.
C.
Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves as follows: 1. 2. Valves: Install chain and padlock on open OS&Y gate valve. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post.
D. E.
Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch. Water-Flow Indicators: Install in water-service piping in vault. Select indicator with saddle and vane matching pipe size. Drill hole in pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe. Connect alarm devices to building fire alarm system. Wiring and firealarm devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm." CONNECTIONS Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping connections to valves and equipment. Connect water-distribution piping to existing water main. Use service clamp and corporation valve. Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic water and firesuppression piping. 221113 - 34
F.
3.22 A.
B. C. D.
E. F.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.
3.23 A.
B.
C. 3.24 A.
Prepare reports of testing activities. IDENTIFICATION Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water-service piping, on main electrical meter panel. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for identifying devices. CLEANING Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows: 1. 2. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. 221113 - 35
B.
3.25 A.
3.
Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.
b.
c. d.
B.
Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
221113 - 36
SECTION 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS (GRAVITY FLOW) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure sanitary sewerage outside the building, with the following components: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.3 A. B. Special fittings for expansion and deflection. Cleanouts. Precast concrete and/or Cast-in-place concrete manholes and structures. .
1.2 A.
DEFINITIONS PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic - Pipe. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic - Grease interceptor and Septic Tanks. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Special pipe fittings.
1.4 A.
1.5 A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers. Include design calculations, and concrete design-mix report for cast-in-place manholes. 221313 -1
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
C.
Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Do not store plastic pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. Handle manholes instructions. according to manufacturer's written rigging
1.6 A. B. C.
1.7 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. Notify A/E no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. Do not proceed with interruption of service without A/Es written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, UPON APPROVAL OF SUBMITTED SHOP DRAWINGS.
2.2 A. B.
PIPING MATERIALS Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.
Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 -2
1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. ANACO. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. Fernco Inc. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
2. 3. 4.
Couplings for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8-inch- wide shield with 2 bands. Couplings for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands. Couplings for NPS 8 and NPS 10: 4-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.
2.3 A.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 200, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 1. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8: PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. Fittings NPS 10 and Larger: Ductile-iron, compact fittings complying with AWWA C153, for push-on joints and using AWWA C111, rubber gaskets.
2.
B.
PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 and Larger: ASTM F 679, T- 2 wall thickness, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. Shielded, Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosionresistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Manufacturers: 221313 -3
C.
2.4 A.
B.
a. b. c. C.
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 1. Manufacturers: a. b. c. Fernco Inc. Logan Clay Products Company (The). Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
2.5 A.
CLEANOUTS PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping. 1. Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. Canplas Inc. IPS Corporation. NDS Inc. Plastic Oddities, Inc. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. Zurn Light Commercial Specialty Plumbing Products; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
2.6 A.
MANHOLES Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. 2. 3. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 5-inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. Riser Sections: 5-inch minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flatslab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 221313 -4
4. 5.
6. 7.
8. 9.
10.
Steps: Polypropylene steps meeting ASTM C478, ASTM D4101 & ASTM A615. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch- minimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." a. b. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. Protective Coating: Foundry-applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coaltar, epoxy-polyamide paint; 10-mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Cast-in-Place-Concrete Manholes: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete as required to prevent flotation. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. Steps: Polypropylene steps meeting ASTM C478, ASTM D4101 & ASTM A615. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch- minimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." a. b. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. Protective Coating: Foundry-applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coaltar, epoxy-polyamide paint; 10-mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EARTHWORK Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 221313 -5
3.2 A.
CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING The Contractor shall provide the construction staking required to layout the alignment, grades and clearances shown on the plans. 1. The construction staking shall be performed by a licensed surveyor registered in the State where the work is performed. PIPING APPLICATIONS Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. Special Pipe Fittings: Use for pipe expansion and deflection. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: materials for each size range: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Use the following pipe
3.3 A.
B.
C.
NPS 3: NPS 4 PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. NPS 4: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. NPS 5 and NPS 6: NPS 6 PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. NPS 8 and NPS 10: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. NPS 12 and NPS 15: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. NPS 18 to NPS 24: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
3.4 A.
PIPING INSTALLATION General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. 221313 -6
B.
C.
Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or combination of both. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the profiles shown in the plans. 1. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
D. E.
F.
Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. MANHOLE INSTALLATION General: Install manholes accessories indicated. complete with appurtenances and
3.5 A.
3.6 A. B. C. D. E.
Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891. Construct cast-in-place manholes as indicated. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. CONCRETE PLACEMENT Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R.
3.7 A.
221313 -7
3.8 A.
CLEANOUT INSTALLATION Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. 2. Use medium-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicletraffic service areas.
B.
Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. CONNECTIONS Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. Connect to grease interceptors specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Interceptors." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. 2. Submit separate report for each system inspection. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. b. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
C.
3.9 A.
B. C.
3.10 A.
c. d. e.
221313 -8
3. 4. B.
Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. Submit separate report for each test. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of pipe, during 24-hour period. Close openings in system and fill with water. Purge air and refill with water. Disconnect water supply. Test and inspect joints for leaks. Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic Testing" Section. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig.
6.
Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417.
7. C. D.
Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969.
Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. CLEANING Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous material.
3.11 A.
221313 -9
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants and grass to remain. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants and grass. Clearing and grubbing. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. (Examples are fence and landscape items) Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.
1.2 A.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEED requirements. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures. Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting trees remaining on-site that are affected by site operations. Division 01 Section "Execution" for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings or structures undergoing alterations. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. Division 23 Section "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading including preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 1
1.3 A.
DEFINITIONS Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. MATERIAL OWNERSHIP Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. SUBMITTALS Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. QUALITY ASSURANCE Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." PROJECT CONDITIONS Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
1.4 A.
1.5 A.
B.
1.6 A.
1.7 A.
2.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 2
B.
Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.
C. D. E.
Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. PREPARATION Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. 3.2 A. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to sediment and erosion control Drawings a sediment and erosion control plan, specific to the site, that complies with EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
B.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 3
C. 3.3 A.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. TREE PROTECTION Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. 2. 3. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.
B. C.
Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. 2. 3. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.
4. D.
Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect.
2. 3.4 A.
UTILITIES Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 4
1. B.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.
Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. 2. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
C.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. Notify A/E not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without A/E's written permission.
D. 3.5 A.
Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. CLEARING AND GRUBBING Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. 2. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.
3. 4. 5. B.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.6 A.
TOPSOIL STRIPPING Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 5
B.
Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.
C.
Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. Protect the perimeter of stockpiles with silt fence. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
3.7 A. B.
SITE IMPROVEMENTS Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, fence and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.
3.8 A.
DISPOSAL Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION 311000
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 6
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. Soils Report: A subsurface investigation and soils report has been performed for this project and is included as an appendix to these specifications. CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING The Contractor shall provide the construction staking required to layout the alignment, grades and clearances shown on the plans 1. A licensed surveyor registered in the State where the work is performed shall perform the construction staking. INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY The Contractor shall provide the construction and materials testing required as called for in these specifications. 1. An Independent Certified Testing Laboratory having certified personnel shall be employed to perform the required testing. EROSION CONTROL The Contractor shall provide and maintain the Erosion Control as shown on the plans and as directed by the A/E, as part of the EARTH MOVING. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and grasses and exterior plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 9. Excavating, shaping and placing membrane lining, separation geotextile fabric and drainage course for wastewater treatment facility. 312000 - 1
1.2 A.
1.3 A.
1.4 A.
1.5 A.
EARTH MOVING
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for quantity allowance provisions related to unit-price rock excavation and authorized additional excavation. 2. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for unit-price rock excavation and authorized additional excavation provisions. 3. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for recording preexcavation and earthwork progress. 4. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities. 5. Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting and trimming trees to remain. 6. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade. 7. Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures. 8. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 9. Division 31 Section "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during construction. 10. Division 31 Section "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling of excavations. 11. Division 31 Section "Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts" for excavation of shafts and disposal of surplus excavated material. 12. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading, including preparing and placing topsoil and planting soil for lawns. 13. Division 32 Section "Plants" for planting bed establishment and tree and shrub pit excavation and planting. 14. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for drainage of foundations. DEFINITIONS Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving or PCC Portland Cement Pavement. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. 312000 - 2
1.6 A.
B. C. D.
EARTH MOVING
E. F.
Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices listed in the schedule of values and agreed to. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 5 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 2 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, trackmounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf ; measured according to SAE J-1179. 2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other manmade stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. 312000 - 3
G. H.
I.
J.
K.
EARTH MOVING
L. 1.7 A. B. C.
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. REFERENCES AASHTO M147-65 - Materials for Aggregate and Soil-Aggregate. ASTM D 75 (AASHTO T 86) - Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. ASTM C 131 (AASHTO T 96) - Resistance to Degradation of SmallSize Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
D. ASTM C 136 (AASHTO T 27) - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. E. ASTM D 698 (AASHTO T 99) - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop. ASTM D 1556 (AASHTO T 191) - Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. ASTM D 2922 - Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods. ASTM D 4318 (AASHTO T 89) - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. UNIT PRICES Unit prices for earthwork are included in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices." Projects where earthwork is Lump Sum or Incidental unit prices are used for progress payments or pay for changes in scope of work only. Quantity allowances for earthwork are included in Division 01 Section "Allowances." Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to exceed the following. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials. 1. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. 2. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. 3. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. 4. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. 5. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. 312000 - 4
F. G. H. 1.8 A.
B. C.
EARTH MOVING
6. 1.9 A.
6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Geotextile. 3. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. 4. Geofoam. Samples: geotextile. 12-by-12-inch Sample of subdrainage and separation
B. C.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each soil material proposed for fill and backfill. QUALITY ASSURANCE Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." PROJECT CONDITIONS Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify A/E not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without A/E's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. 312000 - 5
1.10 A.
B.
1.11 A.
B.
EARTH MOVING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. SOIL MATERIALS General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GM, GW, GP, GP-GM, GW-GM, GM, GC, GP-GC, GW-GC, SM, SW-SM, SC, SW, SW-SC, SP, SP-SM, SP-SC, SM and ML, IN UNDISTURBED STATE. AASHTO M 145 Soil Classification Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487 A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate 312000 - 6
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
EARTH MOVING
grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. J. K. 2.2 A. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. GEOTEXTILES Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL Controlled Low-Strength Material: Low-density, self-compacting, flowable concrete material as follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 3/8-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 4. Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869. 5. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 6. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 312000 - 7
B.
2.3 A.
EARTH MOVING
B. 2.4 A. B.
Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 80psi compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C 495. GEOFOAM Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: lb/cu. ft.. ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.60
Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type I, 0.90 lb/cu. ft.. 1. Manufacture molded polystyrene with an inorganic mineral registered with the EPA and suitable for application as a termite deterrent. Geofoam Connectors: Geofoam manufacturer's multibarbed galvanized steel sheet connectors.
C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. PREPARATION Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. DEWATERING Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system, specified in Division 31 Section "Dewatering," to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water 312000 - 8
B.
C.
D. 3.2 A.
B.
EARTH MOVING
away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3.3 A. 3.4 A. EXPLOSIVES Explosives: Do not use explosives. EXCAVATION, GENERAL Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. f. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe. EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. 3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 312000 - 9
3.5 A.
EARTH MOVING
3.6 A. 3.7 A.
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. SUBGRADE INSPECTION Notify A/E when excavations have reached required subgrade. If A/E determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
B.
C.
D.
3.8 A. B. C.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 10
1.
2. 3.
Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proofrolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
D. E.
Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Provide Erosion Control Silt Fence around perimeter stockpile areas. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. BACKFILL Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 312000 - 11
3.9 A.
3.10 A.
3.11 A.
EARTH MOVING
B. 3.12 A. B.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete." Provide 4-inchthick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled lowstrength material to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled lowstrength material to final subgrade elevation. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. SOIL FILL Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. 312000 - 12
C.
D.
E.
F. G. H. I. J. 3.13 A.
EARTH MOVING
B.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inchesin loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 157: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent. GRADING General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 312000 - 13
C. 3.14 A.
3.15 A.
B. C.
3.16 A.
EARTH MOVING
1. 2. B.
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Division 33 Section "Subdrainage." Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. Compact each filter material layer with a minimum of two passes of a plate-type vibratory compactor. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. Compact each filter material layer with a minimum of two passes of a plate-type vibratory compactor. 2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inchthick compacted layers to final subgrade. SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 312000 - 14
C.
3.17 A. B.
C.
3.18 A. B.
EARTH MOVING
3. 4.
5.
Place subbase and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3.19 A. B.
DRAINAGE COURSE Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under castin-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows: 1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. 312000 - 15
3.20 A.
B.
C.
D.
EARTH MOVING
2.
3.
ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
E.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. PROTECTION Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 312000
3.21 A. B.
C.
3.22 A.
B.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 16
SECTION 312200 - AGGREGATE BASE COURSE and GRAVEL SURFACING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Aggregate base course. 2. Gravel Surfacing. REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. AASHTO M147-65 - Materials for Aggregate and Soil-Aggregate. ASTM D 75 (AASHTO T 86) - Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. ASTM C 131 (AASHTO T 96) - Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. ASTM C 136 (AASHTO T 27) - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. ASTM D 698 (AASHTO T 99) - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop. ASTM D 1556 (AASHTO T 191) - Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. ASTM D 2922 - Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods. ASTM D 4318 (AASHTO T 89) - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. SD 211 - FLH T 507 - Fractured Faces, Crushed Particle Test. SUBMITTALS A. Samples shall submitted to the testing laboratory for each type of aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 75. 312200 - 1
1.2 A.
1.3
F. G. H. I. 1.4
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE and GRAVEL SURFACING
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MATERIALS Aggregate Base Course: Angular, crushed; free of shale, clay, friable materials and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136 within the limits of the attached table for the material specified:
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify subgrade has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct, and at the proper moisture content.
3.2 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT A. B. C. D. E. Spread course aggregate over prepared base to a total compacted thickness shown on the Drawings. Place course aggregate in compacted lifts as shown on the plans (no greater than 4 inch deep). Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated. Add small quantities of base course as appropriate to assist compaction. Compact placed aggregate materials to achieve compaction to 95 percent of its maximum dry density in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content. Use mechanical vibrating tamping in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.
F. G.
3.3 TOLERANCES A. B. C. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch. Variation from True Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AGGREGATE BASE COURSE and GRAVEL SURFACING 312200 - 2
A. B.
Gradation of Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C136. Compaction testing will be based on laboratory tests done in accordance with ASTM D698. Field densities shall be determined by one of the following methods: 1. ASTM D 1556 - Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. 2. ASTM D 2922 - Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. Frequency of Tests: One field density test is required for every 1000 square yards of aggregate base course in place on each lift. The Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Laboratory to perform testing at materials during and after incorporation into the work. The Laboratory shall be AMRL Certified. 1. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Laboratory to facilitate the testing work. 2. Employment of the Laboratory will in no way relieve the Contractor of any obligations of the Contract. 3. Testing required due to rework or retests, due to failing tests will be paid by the Contractor.
C. D. E.
AGGREGATES FOR GRAULAR BASES AND SURFACING Limestone Ledge Rock Gravel Cushion Aggregate Base Base Base Course Course Course PERCENT PASSING 100 80-100 68-91 46-70 34-58 13-35 3.0-12.0 25 0-6 40 1,2 crushed 100 80-100 68-90 42-70 29-53 10-28 3.0-12.0 25 0-3 40 crushed 100 80-100 68-90 42-70 29-53 28-Oct 3.-12.0 25 0-3 40 crushed Gravel Cushion Gravel Surfacing
REQUIREMENT SIEVE 2" (50mm) 1" (25.0mm) 3/4" (19.0mm) 1/2" (12.5mm) No. 4 (4.75mm) No. 8 (2.36mm) No. 40 (425 m) No. 200 (75 m) Liquid Limit Plastic Index L.A. Abra. Loss max. Foot Notes Processing Required
Subbase 100 70-100
100 30-70 22-62 10-35 0.0-15.0 0-6 50 crushed 50-75 38-64 15-35 3.0-12.0 25 0-6 40 2 crushed
100 46-70 29-53 10-28 3.0-12.0 25 0-3 40 crushed 312200 - 3
100 50-78 37-67 13-35 4.0-15.0 4-12 40 crushed
Granular material of which 30% of the particles retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve shall contain one or more fractured faces. 1. The fraction passing the No. 200 sieve shall not be greater than 2/3 of the fraction passing the No. 40. In no case shall the upper limit specified for the No. 200 sieve be exceeded. 2. Requirements include quarried ledge rock.
SAMPLING AND TESTING Sampling Gradation Liquid Limit and Plastic Index L. A. Abrasion Test Sodium Sulfate Soundness Durability Index Specific Gravity, Absorption of Coarse Aggregate Specific Gravity, Absorption of Fine Aggregate Classification ASTM D 75 C 136 D 4318 C 131 AASHTO SDDOT T2 SD 201 T 11, T 27 SD 202 T 89, T 90 SD 207 T 96 T 96 T 210 T 85 T 84 M 145
312200 - 4
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. The Concrete Paving shall be placed to the grades and sections shown in the plans. INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY The contractor shall provide the Mix Design, Construction and Materials Testing required as call for in these specifications. 1. An Independent ACI and AASHTO Certified Testing Laboratory having ACI certified personnel shall be employed to perform the required testing SUMMARY This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Curbs and gutters. 2. Walkways. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" mix design requirements for GREEN CONCRETE. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants of joints in concrete pavement and at isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent construction.
1.2 A.
1.3 A.
B.
1.4 A.
DEFINITIONS Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash Class F and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.
GREEN CONCRETE - The Portland (WHITE PIGMINTED) Cement Concrete. The Design Mix shall be Normal Strength, Workable and CONCRETE PAVING 321313 -1
B.
Economically Proportioned to make the most efficient use of the raw products required. This requires a mix with a minimized paste content and an optimized aggregate gradation matching the 0.45 power curve or Modified Haystack Curve with the Coarseness Factor within Zone II of the Modified Coarseness Factor Char Shilstone Method. Use of the KU Concrete Mix Design, seeMIX II or Air Force or similar Concrete Design Mix Computer Programs is required. The use of Hiperpave II or equal Computer Program is required to evaluate date and environmental conditions for optimum placement and curing of the pavement for the design mix. Exterior exposed concrete shall be pigmented White. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. B. C. SUBMITTALS Product Data: See Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete". QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Concrete". See Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Testing Agency Qualifications: See Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete". Concrete Testing Service: Concrete". See Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 321313 -2
2. 3.
4.
CONCRETE PAVING
2.2 A.
FORMS Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less.
B.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. STEEL REINFORCEMENT Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed. Synthetic Structural Fiber: Grace STRUX 90/40 (equal substitutions Fibermesh of Euclid Chemical) specific gravity 0.92, minimum length 1.5 inches, aspect ratio 80-100. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain steel bars. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. 2. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. 321313 -3 with
2.3 A. B.
C.
D. E. F. G.
H.
CONCRETE PAVING
2.4 A.
CONCRETE MATERIALS Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, white. a. b. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: Grade 100 or 120. ASTM C 989,
Normal-Weight Aggregates: Place Concrete".
See Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
B. C. D.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.5 A. B. C. D.
CURING MATERIALS Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry. Moisture-Retaining Cover: burlap-polyethylene sheet. Water: Potable. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white
a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm. b. Burke by Edeco; BurkeFilm. CONCRETE PAVING
321313 -4
c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. E.
ChemMasters; Spray-Film. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Aquafilm. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con. MBT Protection and Repair, ChemRex Inc.; Confilm. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. Symons Corporation; Finishing Aid. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist. Curing Compound:
Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 1. Products: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o.
Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. Burke by Edoko; Aqua Resin Cure. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11W). Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-Clear. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E. Symons Corporation; Resi-Chem Clear. Tamms Industries Inc.; Horncure WB 30. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. Curing Compound:
F.
White Waterborne Membrane-Forming ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B. 1. Products: a. b. c.
Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing #2 WP WB. Burke by Edoco; Resin Emulsion White. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure 2000.
Compound
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 -5
d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. 2.6 A. B.
Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem White Pigmented Cure (J-10-W). Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez VOX White Pigmented. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 450. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-White. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R-2. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1200-White. Symons Corporation; Resi-Chem White. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Horncure 200-W. Unitex; Hydro White. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure White 100.
RELATED MATERIALS Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: saturated cellulosic fiber. ASTM D 1751, asphalt-
Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 1. Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 2. Bayer Corporation. ChemMasters. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. Davis Colors. Elementis Pigments, Inc. Hoover Color Corporation. Lambert Corporation. Scofield, L. M.Company. Solomon Colors.
Color: White.
2.7
CONCRETE MIXTURES 1. Prepare design mixtures, See Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
B.
Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 321313 -6
CONCRETE PAVING
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. Class F Fly Ash: 35% Aggregate: 1 crushed optimum graded 0.45 power curve or modified haystack. Synthetic Structural Fiber: 4.5 pounds per cubic yard. Coarseness Factor: Zone II Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. 2. 3. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size
2.8 A.
CONCRETE MIXING Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B.
Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. 1. For concrete mixes of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For concrete mixes larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water added.
2. 3.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 -7
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. EXAMINATION Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. 2. 3. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch require correction according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
C.
Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. PREPARATION Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. STEEL REINFORCEMENT General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
3.2 A.
3.3 A.
B.
3.4 A. B.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 -8
C.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. JOINTS General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 A.
B.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
2. 3.
4.
5.
C.
Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless otherwise indicated. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove 321313 -9
CONCRETE PAVING
protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groove marks on concrete surfaces. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. 1/8 inch joints are not required to be sealed. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
2.
3.
E.
Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. CONCRETE PLACEMENT Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. 321313 -10
3.6 A.
B. C.
D. E. F.
CONCRETE PAVING
G.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
H.
I.
Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed. 1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect.
J. K.
Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. 321313 -11
L.
M.
2. 3.
CONCRETE PAVING
N.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
2.
3.
3.7 A. B.
FLOAT FINISHING General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across floatfinished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.
2.
3.
3.8 A. B. C.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to 321313 -12
CONCRETE PAVING
manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. E. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retainingcover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. b. c. Water. Continuous water-fog spray. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2.
3.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.9 A.
PAVEMENT TOLERANCES Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Elevation: 1/4 inch. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 -13
3.10 A. B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 5000 sq. ft. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.
C.
Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. Test results shall be reported in writing to Contracting Officer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and 321313 -14
D.
CONCRETE PAVING
materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Contracting Officer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. REPAIRS AND PROTECTION Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Drill test cores, where directed by Contracting Officer, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
F.
G. H.
3.11 A. B.
C.
D.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 -15
SECTION 321373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. B. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement. 1/8 inch saw joints are not required to be sealed.
1.2 A.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing nontraffic and traffic joints in locations not specified in this Section. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.
1.3 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint-sealant samples in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. Qualification Data: For testing agency. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 321373 -1
C. D. E.
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
2. F.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for sealants. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to jointsealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
1.4 A. B. C.
2.
3. 4.
5.
D.
Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing of current sealant products within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed with the Work. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1.5 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and 321373 -2
designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
1.6 A.
3. 4. 5.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. MATERIALS, GENERAL Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Contracting Officer from manufacturer's full range.
B.
2.2 A.
B.
321373 -3
2.3 A.
COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS Multicomponent Jet-Fuel-Resistant Sealant for Concrete: Pourable, chemically curing elastomeric formulation complying with the following requirements for formulation and with ASTM C 920 for type, grade, class, and uses indicated: 1. Urethane Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 12-1/2; Uses T, M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Products: 1) 2. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-300.
Coal-Tar-Modified Polymer Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Products: 1) Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Gardox.
3.
Bitumen-Modified Urethane Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Products: 1) Tremco Sealant/Waterproofing Division; Vulkem 202.
B.
Single-Component Jet-Fuel-Resistant Urethane Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, pourable, coal-tar-modified, urethane formulation complying with ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Products: a. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Sonomeric 1.
C.
Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, lowmodulus, neutral-curing, nonsag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS. 1. Products: a. b. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone. Dow Corning Corporation; 888.
Type SL Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing, self-leveling silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type SL. CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373 -4
D.
1.
Products: a. b. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone SL. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL.
E.
Multicomponent Low-Modulus Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Proprietary formulation consisting of reactive petropolymer and activator components producing a pourable, self-leveling sealant. 1. Products: a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sof-Seal.
2.4 A.
HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS Jet-Fuel-Resistant Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete: Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3569. 1. Products: a. b. Crafco Inc.; Superseal 444/777. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Poly-Jet 3569. Single-
B.
Jet-Fuel-Resistant Sealant for Concrete and Tar Concrete: component formulation complying with ASTM D 3581. 1. Products: a. b. c. d. Crafco Inc.; Superseal 1614A. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Poly-Jet 1614. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Poly-Jet 3406. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Poly-Jet 3569.
C.
Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete: complying with ASTM D 3406. 1. Products: a. b.
Single-component formulation
Crafco Inc.; Superseal 444/777. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Poly-Jet 3406. Single-component formulation
D.
Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: complying with ASTM D 3405. 1. Products: a. b. c.
Koch Materials Company; Product No. 9005. Koch Materials Company; Product No. 9030. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Hi-Spec. 321373 -5
2.5 A.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. PRIMERS Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
C.
D.
2.6 A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
PREPARATION Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373 -6
B.
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 A. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3. D. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
B.
C.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
E.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
F. G.
Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated. 321373 -7
3.4 A.
CLEANING Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
3.5 A.
321373 -8
SECTION 323113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. B. 1.3 A. Chain-Link Fences: Industrial. a. 6-Foot Security Fence
1.2 A.
Related Sections include the following: SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates. 1. 2. 3. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. Gates and hardware.
1.4 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed chain-link fences and gates similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
1.5 A.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
323113 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC General: Height indicated on Drawings. Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with ASTM A 392, CLFMI CLF 2445, and requirements indicated below: 1. Steel Wire Fabric: Metallic-coated wire with a diameter of 0.192 inch. a. b. Mesh Size: : 2 inches. Weight of Metallic (Zinc) Coating: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 2, 2.0 oz./sq. ft. with zinc coating applied before weaving.
2. 2.2 A.
Selvage: Fabric 6-0 and under Knuckled at both selvages.
INDUSTRIAL FENCE FRAMING Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, ASTM F 1083 for Group IC round pipe, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Group: IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40 IC, round steel pipe, yield strength 50,000 psi. Fence Height: : 6 feet. Strength Requirement: Heavy industrial according to ASTM F 1043. Post Size and Thickness: According to ASTM F 1043. a. b. c. d. e. Top Rail: 1.66 inches. Line Post: 2.375 inches. End, Corner and Pull Post: 2.875 inches. Swing Gate Post: : : 4-inch diameter, 8.65-lb/ft. weight. Horizontal-Slide Gate Post: : 1) 5. Openings wider than 12 Feet: diameter, and 8.65-lb/ft. weight. Steel post, 4-inch
Coating for Steel Framing: a. Metallic Coating: 1) Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0oz./sq. ft. average zinc coating per ASTM A 123/A 123M or 4.0-oz./sq. ft. zinc coating per ASTM A 653/A 653M. 323113 - 2
2.3 A.
TENSION WIRE General: Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations: 1. Location: Extended along bottom of fence fabric.
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch- diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 817, ASTM A 824, and the following: 1. Metallic Coating: Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) by hot-dip or electrolytic process, with the following minimum coating weight: a. Class 2: Not less than 1.2 oz./sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface.
2.4 A.
INDUSTRIAL SWING GATES General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for double swing gate types. 1. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083 for materials and protective coatings.
B.
Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round, galvanized steel tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 and the following: 1. 2. 3. Gate Fabric Height: 2 inches less than adjacent fence height. Leaf Width: : As indicated. Frame Members: a. Tubular Steel: 2 inches rectangular.
C.
Frame Corner Construction: 1. Welded.
D.
Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, center gate stops and keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. FITTINGS General: Comply with ASTM F 626. Post and Line Caps: Provide for each post. 1. Line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.
2.5 A. B.
323113 - 3
C. D.
Rail and Brace Ends: Attach rails securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post. Rail Fittings: Provide the following: 1. 2. Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches long. Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting intermediate and bottom rails in the fence line-to-line posts.
E. F.
Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel. Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626. 1. Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the following: a. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: : 0.148-inch- diameter wire; galvanized coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric.
G.
H.
Finish: 1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. zinc.
2.6 A.
FENCE GROUNDING Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger. 1. 2. 3. Material above Finished Grade: Copper. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.
B.
Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467. 1. 2. Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic welded type. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel. a. Size: 5/8 by 96 inches.
323113 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
PREPARATION Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified. 1. Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line.
3.3 A.
3.4 A. B.
CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade; shape and smooth to shed water.
2.
Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 5
C.
D. E.
Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet o.c. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. 1. Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric 6 feet or higher, on fences with top rail and at 2/3 fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension.
F.
Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch- diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. 1. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire.
G.
Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer. Bottom Rails: Install, spanning between posts. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches o.c. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at 1 end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing. 1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches o.c. and to braces at 24 inches o.c.
H. I.
J.
K.
323113 - 6
L.
Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. GATE INSTALLATION Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. GROUNDING AND BONDING Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet except as follows: 1. Fences within 100 Feet of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at maximum intervals of 750 feet. a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening. 1) 2) Bond metal gates to gate posts. Bond across openings, with and without gates, except openings indicated as intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 18 inches below finished grade.
3.5 A.
3.6 A.
B.
Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing. Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location,. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 323113 - 7
C.
D. E.
1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
3.7 A.
ADJUSTING Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
323113 - 8
SECTION 329300 - PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. See BIA General Provisions. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Plants. Planting soils. Tree stabilization. Landscape edgings.
1.2 A.
Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. DEFINITIONS Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than sizes indicated; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
1.3 A. B.
C.
D. E.
Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. PLANTS 329300-1
F. G.
Planting Area: Areas to be planted. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils. 1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.
H.
I.
J. K.
1.4 A.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. 2. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
C.
D.
Material Test Reports: For existing native surface topsoil and imported or manufactured topsoil.
PLANTS
329300-2
E.
Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network: a. b. Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior. Certified Ornamental Landscape Professional, designated COLP.
F. 1.5 A.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil. 1. 2. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling; with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Contracting Officer. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. 329300-3
C.
3. PLANTS
a.
b.
Based upon the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.
D. E.
Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above the root flare for larger sizes. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.
2.
1.6 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable. Bulk Materials: 1. 2. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.
B.
C.
Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. 329300-4
PLANTS
D.
Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. Handle planting stock by root ball. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F (16 to 18 deg C) until planting. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. 2. 3. 4. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots that are in dry condition in water for two hours. Reject dried-out plants. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly-wet condition.
E. F. G.
1.7 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 329300-5
B.
1.8 A.
PLANTS
a.
b. c. 2.
Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. Faulty performance of tree stabilization edgings .
Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion : a. b. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.
3.
Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. b. c. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material.
d.
1.9 A.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: Three months from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of planting completion
PLANTS
329300-6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. PLANT MATERIAL General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cutoff limbs more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.
2.
B.
Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Contracting Officer, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is shown on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting. INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS Amend Soils per Nurseries recommendations for each species of plant.
C.
D.
E.
2.2 A.
PLANTS
329300-7
2.3 A. 2.4 A.
FERTILIZERS Fertilize per Nurseries recommendations for each plant species. PLANTING SOILS Planting Soil : Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer retained during excavation process and stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of native surface topsoil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. 2. Supplement with planting soil when quantities are insufficient. Mix existing, native surface topsoil with Nursery recommended soil amendments and fertilizers.
2.5 A.
MULCHES Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of following type, size range, and color: 1. 2. 3. Type: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone . Size Range: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) maximum, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum . Color: Uniform tan-beige color range acceptable to Contracting Officer .
2.6 A.
TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS Stakes and Guys: 1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new softwood with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal (38-by38-mm actual) by length indicated, pointed at one end. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes or turnbuckles. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanizedsteel wire, two-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch (2.7 mm) in diameter. Tree-Tie Webbing: UV-resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets. Guy Cables: Five-strand, 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) long, with two 3/8-inch (10-mm) galvanized eyebolts. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches (150 mm) long. 329300-8
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. PLANTS
2.7 A.
LANDSCAPE EDGINGS Plastic Edging: Standard black polyethylene or vinyl edging, horizontally grooved, extruded in standard lengths, with 9-inch (225-mm) plastic stakes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. Oly-Ola Edgings, Inc. Valley View Industries.
Edging Size: 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) wide by 5 inches (125 mm) deep . Top Profile: Straight, with top 2 inches (50 mm) being 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. Top Profile: Round top, 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard alignment clips or plugs.
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. EXAMINATION Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.
2. 3.
4. B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PLANTS
329300-9
C.
If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Contracting Officer and replace with new planting soil. PREPARATION Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Contracting Officer's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required. Lay out plants at locations directed by Contracting Officer. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation. 1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.
3.2 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation. PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm) . Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm) but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
3.3 A.
PLANTS
329300-10
a.
Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches (50 mm) of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.
B.
Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Before planting, obtain Contracting Officer's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. 2. 3. 4. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped container-grown stock. Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's personnel. If drain tile is shown on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile.
C.
3.4 A.
5.
6. 7. 8. B. C.
Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil. Obstructions: Notify Contracting Officer if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.
PLANTS
329300-11
1.
Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- (150-mm-) diameter holes, 24 inches (600 mm) apart, into free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.
D. E.
Drainage: Notify Contracting Officer if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Contracting Officer. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Contracting Officer, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. TREE STABILIZATION Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch (50through 125-mm) caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch (50-mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches (450 mm) below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to the dimension shown on Drawings above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Use two stakes for trees up to 12 feet (3.6 m) high and 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet (4.2 m) high and up to 4 inches (100 mm) in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
3.5 A. B. C.
D. 3.6 A.
2.
3. 4.
B. PLANTS
Staking and Guying: Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet (4.2 m) in height and more than 3 inches (75 mm) in caliper unless otherwise 329300-12
indicated. Securely attach no fewer than three guys to stakes 30 inches (760 mm) long, driven to grade. 1. Site-Fabricated Staking-and-Guying Method: a. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. b. Support trees with strands of cable or multiple strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. c. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches (760 mm) above finish grade. d. Paint turnbuckles with luminescent white paint.
C.
Root-Ball Stabilization: Install at- or below-grade stabilization system to secure each new planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Hold-Down Method: Place vertical stakes against side of root ball and drive them into subsoil; place horizontal wood holddown stake across top of root ball and screw at each end to one of the vertical stakes. a. Install stakes of length required to penetrate at least to the dimension shown on Drawings below bottom of backfilled excavation. Saw stakes off at horizontal stake. Install screws through horizontal hold-down and penetrating at least 1 inch (25 mm) into stakes. Predrill holes if necessary to prevent splitting wood. Install second set of stakes on other side of root trunk for larger trees as indicated.
b.
c.
3.7 A. B. C. D.
GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing. Use planting soil for backfill. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.
E.
PLANTS
329300-13
F. G.
Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. PLANTING AREA MULCHING Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Mineral Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness of mineral mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 6 inches (150 mm) of trunks or stems. EDGING INSTALLATION Plastic Edging: Install plastic edging where indicated and around gravel mulch areas to separate from unlandscaped areas according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with stakes spaced approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) apart, driven through upper base grooves or V-lip of edging. Shovel-Cut Edging: Separate mulched areas from turf areas, curbs, and paving with a 45-degree, 4- to 6-inch- (100- to 150-mm-) deep, shovelcut edge. PLANT MAINTENANCE Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing treestabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.
3.8 A.
3.9 A.
B.
3.10 A.
B.
C.
PLANTS
329300-14
3.11 A. B.
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site. DISPOSAL Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
C.
3.12 A.
PLANTS
329300-15
APPENDIX - A

Oj

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Oj

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

PUEBLO PINTADO DORMITORY II BIA PROJECT NUMBER Y9N3N000 PUEBLO PINTADO, NEW MEXICO Division ......

This Page Intentionally Blank

APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION

This Page Intentionally Blank

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. NOT APPLICABLE THIS SECTION.

SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRIOR APPROVAL TO QUOTE: A. Refer to Division 1.

SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Refer to Division 1.

MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS: A. Refer to Division 1.

GUARANTEE: A. Refer to Division 1.

END OF SECTION 15010

This Page Intentionally Blank

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. NOT APPLICABLE THIS SECTION.

Heat Pumps: 1. 2. Design CFM Measured CFM

SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control test reports.

PIPE AND FITTINGS

PIPE AND FITTINGS

PIPE AND FITTINGS

See Section 15100.

PIPE AND FITTINGS

PIPE AND FITTINGS

PIPE AND FITTINGS

PIPE AND FITTINGS

This Page Intentionally Blank

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

Plastic Piping: a. All Sizes 4'

Cast Iron Pipe: a. b. 5' Lengths 10' Lengths 5' 10'

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

This Page Intentionally Blank

This Page Intentionally Blank

This Page Intentionally Blank

HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

This Page Intentionally Blank

1.3 AGENCY LISTINGS: A. UL 916 Energy Management Systems

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

FCC-Part 15 Subparagraph J. Class A. Emissions requirements

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Optional Features To Be Included: 1. Hand-off-automatic control with manual speed control.

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL